Honda CIVIC Hatchback Owner’s Manual 2021

Owner’s Manual

2021 CIVIC

Hatchback

 

Honda CIVIC Hatchback Owner’s Manual 2021 Download

 

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

Software End User License Agreement

Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement.

You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 100-5E-8A, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746.

Privacy Notice

This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.

To learn more about how we collect and use Personal Information, please read our Privacy Policy, accessible at www.honda.com.

A Few Words About Safety

 

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

Safety Labels – on the vehicle.
Safety Messages – preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:
could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

Safety Headings – such as Important Safety Precautions.
Safety Section – such as Safe Driving.
Instructions – how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information – please

read it carefully.

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.

Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.

This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.

Safe Driving P. 35
For Safe Driving P. 36 Seat Belts P. 40 Airbags P. 48

Instrument Panel P. 81
Indicators P. 82 Gauges and Driver Information Interface P. 122

2 Controls P. 143

Clock P. 144 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 145

Moonroof* P. 170

Adjusting the Seats P. 193

2 Features P. 225

Audio System P. 226 Audio System Basic Operation P. 233, 251

Customized Features P. 343, 350 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*P. 380

2 Driving P. 443

Before Driving P. 444 Towing a Trailer P. 450

Parking Your Vehicle P. 558 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 560

Maintenance P. 569
Before Performing Maintenance P. 570 Maintenance MinderTM P. 573 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 604 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 624

Handling the Unexpected P. 633
Tools P. 634 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 635

Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 665 Overheating P. 666

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 680

Information P. 683
Specifications P. 684 Identification Numbers P. 686

Emissions Testing P. 689 Warranty Coverages P. 692

Child Safety P. 64 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 79 Safety Labels P. 80

Hatch P. 160

Security System P. 163

Opening and Closing the Windows P. 167

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 171

Adjusting the Mirrors P. 190

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 201

Climate Control System P. 217

Audio Error Messages P. 320

General Information on the Audio System P. 324

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 383, 410

When Driving P. 451

Honda Sensing®P. 488

Braking P. 549

Refueling P. 562

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 566

Turbo Engine Vehicle P. 567

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 579

Replacing Light Bulbs P. 594

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 609

Battery P. 620

Remote Transmitter Care P. 622

Cleaning P. 625

Accessories and Modifications P. 631

Handling of the Jack* P. 656

Engine Does Not Start P. 659

If the Battery Is Dead P. 662

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 668

Fuses P. 674

Emergency Towing P. 679

If You Cannot Open the Hatch P. 681

Refueling P. 682

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 687

Reporting Safety Defects P. 688

Authorized Manuals P. 695

Customer Service Information P. 696

Contents

Quick Reference Guide P. 6

Safe Driving P. 35

Instrument Panel P. 81

Controls P. 143

Features P. 225

Driving P. 443

Maintenance P. 569

Handling the Unexpected P. 633

Information P. 683

Index P. 698

Visual Index

 

Quick Reference Guide

System Indicators (P82)
Gauges (P122)
Driver Information Interface (P124)
(Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P476)
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Button (P543)
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button (P495)
❚Hazard Warning Button ❚Audio System (P233, 251) ❚Navigation System*

() See the Navigation System Manual

❚USB Extension Cable*2 (P227)

❚Rear Defogger (P188)

❚Heated Door Mirror Button* (P188)

❚Climate Control System (P217)

❚Front Seat Heater Buttons* (P215)

❚USB Port (P227)

❚ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P172)

❚Ignition Switch* (P171)

❚Steering Wheel Adjustments (P189)

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*2: Pre-installed on U.S. models only.

6

❚Headlights/Turn Signals (P176)

 

❚Fog Lights* (P180)

❚LaneWatchTM* (P480)

❚Paddle Shifter (Shift down)* (P466)

❚ (TRIP) Knob (P127)

❚Brightness Control (P187)

❚Wipers/Washers (P184)

❚Paddle Shifter (Shift up)* (P466)

❚Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Speed Follow Buttons* (P501)

❚Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons*

(P518)

❚Interval Button (P512)

❚Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button

(P533)

❚MAIN Button (P489, 502, 519, 535)

❚Horn (Press an area around

.)

(Display/Information) Button (P125)

❚Navigation System Voice Control Buttons*

(P276) () See the Navigation System Manual

❚Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System

❚ENTER Button (P134, 230)

Voice Control Buttons (P383, 410)

❚ 3 / 4 / / Buttons (P134, 230)

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 7

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index

 

Power Window Switches (P167)
Master Door Lock Switch (P158)
Door Mirror Controls (P192)
❚Interior Fuse Box (P676)

❚Driver’s Front Airbag (P51)

❚Rearview Mirror (P190)

❚HomeLink® Buttons* (P381)

❚Automatic Brake Hold

Button (P553)

❚Passenger’s Front Airbag

(P51)

❚Wireless Charger* (P209)

❚Glove Box (P203)

❚Shift Lever

Continuously Variable

Transmission (P461, 463)

Manual Transmission (P468)

❚ECON Button* (P472)

❚Drive Mode Switch* (P473)

USB Port* (P227)
Electric Parking Brake Switch (P549)
Hood Release Handle (P581)
8

Cargo Area Light
Interior Light (P201)
Grab Handle
Side Curtain Airbags (P58)

❚Coat Hook (P211)

❚Seat Belts (P40)

❚Map Lights (P202)

❚Moonroof Switch* (P170)

❚Sun Visors

❚Vanity Mirrors

❚Accessory Power Socket (P208)

❚Front Seat (P193)

❚Side Airbags (P56)

Rear Seat (P199)
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P69)
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P72)
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P74)
Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 9

Visual Index

 

Quick Reference Guide

❚Maintenance Under the Hood (P579)

❚Windshield Wipers (P184, 604)

❚Power Door Mirrors (P192)

❚Side Turn Signal Lights* (P176, 601)

❚Door Lock/Unlock Control (P147)

❚Headlights (P177, 594)

❚Front Turn Signal Lights (P176, 598)

❚Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P176, 601)

❚Front Side Marker Lights (P599)

❚Tires (P609, 635)

❚Fog Lights* (P180, 596)

❚How to Refuel (P564)

❚Rear Wiper* (P186, 607)

❚High-Mount Brake Light (P603)

❚Opening/Closing the Hatch (P160)

❚Multi-View Rear Camera (P560)

❚Hatch Release Button (P161)

❚License Plate Light (P603)

❚Taillights (P603)

❚Taillights/Rear Side Marker Lights (P603)

❚Brake Lights (P602)

❚Rear Turn Signal Lights (P602)

❚Back-Up Lights (P602)

10

Eco Assist® System (P 472)

 

1.5 L engine models

Ambient Meter

● The color of the ambient meter changes to green to indicate that the vehicle is being driven in a fuel efficient manner.

The message is displayed for a few seconds when the ECON button is pressed.

ECON Button (P 472)

Helps maximize fuel economy.

ECON Mode Indicator (P 95)

Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 11

Quick Reference Guide

Safe Driving (P 35)

 

Airbags (P 48)

Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P 64)

All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 79)

Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.

Seat Belts (P 40)

● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well

back in the seat.

● Check that your passengers are wearing

their seat belts correctly.

Before Driving Checklist (P 39)

Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints*, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as

low as possible.

12

Instrument Panel (P 81)

 

Gauges (P 122)/Driver Information Interface (P 124)/System Indicators (P 82)

System Indicators

System Indicators

Drive Mode Indicator*

Quick

Lamp

Low Oil Pressure

Indicator

Charging System

Indicator

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability

AssistTM (VSA®)

System Indicator

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF Indicator

ECON Mode Indicator*

System Message

Indicator

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator*

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow* Indicator (Amber/ Green)

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator

Gear Position Indicator*

Shift Lever

M (7-speed manual shift mode)

Position Indicator*

Indicator/Shift Indicator*

Shift Up/Down

Tachometer

Indicator*

Temperature

Fuel Gauge

Gauge

Speedometer

Immobilizer System Indicator/

Security System Alarm Indicator

System Indicators

Lights Indicators

Collision Mitigation

Lights On Indicator

Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Lane Keeping Assist

Fog Light Indicator*

System (LKAS)

Indicator (Amber/

Auto High-Beam

Green)

Indicator

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

Hazard Warning Indicators

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator

Automatic

Brake Hold

System Indicator

Automatic Brake Hold Indicator

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)

Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 13

Quick Reference Guide

Controls (P 143)

Clock (P 144)

Models with color audio system

a Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button.

b Rotate to change hour, then press

.

c Rotate to change minute, then press .

d Select Set, then press .

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Models with Display Audio

 

a Press the (Home) button, then select Settings.

b Select Clock, then Clock Adjustment.

c Touch the respective 3 / 4 icon to adjust the hours or minutes up or down.

d Select OK.

Models with navigation system

The clock is automatically updated through the audio system.

ENGINE START/STOP Button* (P 172)

Press the button to change the vehicle’s power mode.
14

Turn Signals (P 176)

Turn Signal Control Lever Right

Left

Lights (P 177)

Light Control Switches

High Beam

Low Beam

Flashing

Wipers and Washers

 

(P 184)

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

MIST

OFF

AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies

automatically

INT*2: Low speed with

intermittent

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.

Adjustment Ring*

(-: Low sensitivity*1

(-: Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2

(+: High sensitivity*1

(+: Higher speed, more sweeps*2

*1:Models with automatic intermittent wipers

*2:Models without automatic intermittent wipers

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system:

Cleaning the windshield
Driving through a car wash
No rain present
Steering Wheel (P 189)

To adjust, pull the adjustment lever toward you, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.
Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 15

Quick Reference Guide

Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside

(P 157)

Pull either front door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time.
Hatch (P160)

Hatch Release

Button

Models without smart entry system

With all the doors unlocked, press the hatch release button and lift open the hatch.
Models with smart entry system

Press the hatch release button to unlock and open the hatch when you carry the smart entry remote.
Power Door Mirrors

 

(P 192)

With the ignition switch in ON w*1, move the selector switch to L or R.
Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Power Windows (P 167)

With the ignition switch in ON w*1, open and close the power windows.
If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passenger’s window can be opened and closed with its own switch.
If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator is on), each passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Indicator

Window

Switch

Power Window Lock Button

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

16

Climate Control System (P217)

Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
Press the button to turn the system on or off.
Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Models with navigation system

The climate control system is voice operable. (P276)

Models with color audio system

Temperature Control Dial Fan Control Dial

AUTO Button (ON/OFF) Button

(Recirculation) Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button (MODE Control) Button

Air flows from floor and

windshield defroster vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and

dashboard vents.

Air flows from dashboard

vents.

Quick Reference Guide

17

Quick Reference Guide

Models with Display Audio

 

Models without SYNC button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon

MODE Control Icon

Fan Control Icon

(CLIMATE) Button

Temperature Control Dial

AUTO Button

(Recirculation) Button

(Fresh Air) Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button

Audio/Information Screen

 

(ON/OFF) Button

Fan Control Dial

Air flows from floor and

windshield defroster vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and

dashboard vents.

Air flows from dashboard

vents.

18

Models with Display Audio

 

Models with SYNC button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon

MODE Control Icon

Fan Control Icon

CLIMATE Button

/ (Fan Control)

Buttons

Driver’s Side Temperature Control Dial

AUTO Button

(ON/OFF) Button

(Recirculation) Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button

Audio/Information Screen

 

SYNC (Synchronization) Button

Passenger’s Side Temperature

Control Dial

Air flows from floor and

windshield defroster vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and

dashboard vents.

Air flows from dashboard

vents.

Quick Reference Guide

19

3 or 4

Quick Reference Guide

Features (P 225)

Audio Remote Controls

(P 230)

3 / 4 / / Button

(+ / (- Bar

ENTER Button

Button

+ / – Bar
Press to adjust the volume up/down.

3 / 4 Button
Press 3 or 4 to cycle through the audio mode as follows:

FM AM SiriusXM®* USB iPod Bluetooth® Audio Pandora®* Apple CarPlay/Android Auto* Audio Apps*

Models with Display Audio

 

ENTER Button
When listening to the radio and SiriusXM®*
a Press ENTER to switch the display to a preset list you stored in the preset buttons.

b Press 3 or 4 to select a preset, then press ENTER.

When listening to a USB flash drive
a Press ENTER to display the folder list.

b Press 3 or 4 to select a folder.

c Press ENTER to display a list of files in that folder.

d Press 3 or 4 to select a file, then press ENTER.

When listening to an iPod
a Press ENTER to display the iPod music list.

b Press 3 or 4 to select a category.

c Press ENTER to display a list of items in the category.

d Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then

press ENTER.

u Press ENTER and press

repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen is displayed.

When listening to Pandora®*
a Press ENTER to display the station list.

b Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then

press ENTER.

When listening to Bluetooth® Audio
a Press ENTER to display the track list.

b Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then

press ENTER.

20

/ Button
Radio:Press to change the preset station. Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station.

USB device:

Press to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder.

Button
Press to change contents.

2 Driver Information Interface

(P124)

 

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 21

Audio System (P 226)

 

Models with color audio system (P 233)

Quick Reference Guide

Driver Information Interface

(Day/Night) Button

RADIO Button

MEDIA Button

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Audio/Information Screen

(Phone) Button

(Sound) Button

Selector Knob

(Seek/Skip) Button

MENU/CLOCK Button

(Seek/Skip) Button

(Back) Button

Preset Buttons (1-6)

22

Models with Display Audio (P 251)

 

For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual

 

*

(Day/Night) Button

(Home) Button

(Map) Button*

(Audio) Button

(Phone) Button

(Back) Button

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/ Power Audio) Knob

Driver Information Interface

Quick Reference Guide

Audio/Information Screen

(Instrument Panel) Icon

* Not available on all models 23

Quick Reference Guide

Driving (P 443)

 

Manual Transmission* (P 468)

Continuously Variable Transmission* (P 461)

Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
Shifting

Models with

Models without

paddle shifters

paddle shifters

Release Button

Depress the brake pedal and press the

release button to move out of (P.

Press the release button to

move the shift lever.

Move the shift lever without

pressing the release button.

Park

Models with paddle shifters

Turn off or start the

Drive (S)

engine.

7-speed manual shift mode can be used.

Transmission is locked.

Shift Lever

Reverse

Used when reversing.

Neutral

Transmission is not

locked.

Drive

Normal driving.

On models with paddle shifters, 7-speed manual shift mode can be used temporarily.

Models without paddle shifters

Drive (S)

Better acceleration.
Increased engine braking.
Going up or down hills.
Models without paddle shifters

Low

Further increased engine braking.
Going up or down hills.
24

Continuously variable transmission models with paddle shifters

 

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode (P465)

Allows you to manually shift the transmission up or down without releasing your hands from the steering wheel.

When the shift lever is in (S

Pulling a paddle shifter changes the mode from continuously variable transmission to 7-speed manual shift mode.
The M indicator and the selected speed number are displayed in the shift indicator.
When the shift lever is in (D

Pulling a paddle shifter temporarily changes the mode from continuously variable transmission to 7-speed manual shift mode. The selected speed number is displayed in the shift indicator.
Shift Down (- Shift Up (+

Paddle Shifter Paddle Shifter

M Indicator

Shift Indicator

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 25

Quick Reference Guide

CMBSTM On and Off

(P 495)

When a possible frontal collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision.
The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine.
To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
VSA® On and Off (P 476)

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.
VSA® comes on automatically every time you start the engine.
To partially disable or fully restore VSA® function, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)* (P 482)

Detects a change in tire conditions and overall dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures.
The TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine.
A calibration procedure must be performed when certain conditions arise.
Refueling (P 562)

 

Fuel recommendation: Models without 18 or 20 inch wheels

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher required

Models with 18 or 20 inch wheels

Unleaded premium gasoline, pump octane number 91 or higher recommended

Fuel tank capacity: 12.39 US gal (46.9 L)

a Unlock the driver’s door.

2 Locking/Unlocking

the Doors from

the Inside

(P156)

b Press on the edge of the fuel fill door to make it pop up slightly.

c After refueling, wait

Wait for five seconds

for about five

seconds before

removing the filler

nozzle.

26

(P 501)

Honda Sensing® (P488)

 

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor located in the lower bumper next to the fog light* and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

The camera is

located behind the

rearview mirror.

Front Sensor Camera

Radar Sensor

The radar sensor is in

the lower bumper.

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P 491)

Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow*

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and

set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.
Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC)* (P 518)

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P 533)

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

(P 541)

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 27

Quick Reference Guide

Maintenance (P 569)

 

Under the Hood (P 579)

● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer

Wiper Blades (P 604)

fluid. Add when necessary.

● Replace blades if they leave streaks

● Check brake/clutch* fluid.

● Check the battery condition monthly.

across the windshield.

a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the

dashboard.

b Locate the hood latch lever, pull it up, and then raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

Tires (P 609)

Lights (P 594)

● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.

● Inspect all lights regularly.

Check tire pressures regularly.
Install snow tires for winter driving.
c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in place.

2.0 L engine models

Handling Summer Only tires and Ultra High Performance (UHP) tires in low ambient temperatures.

Cold Weather Driving (P619)
28

Handling the Unexpected (P 633)

 

Flat Tire (P 635)

Models with temporary tire repair kit

Park in a safe location and repair the flat
tire using the temporary tire repair kit.

Models with a compact spare tire

Engine Won’t Start

(P 659)

If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.
Overheating (P 666)

Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.
Quick Reference

Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire in the cargo area.
Guide

Indicators Come On

(P 668)

Identify the indicator and consult the owner’s manual.
Blown Fuse (P 674)

Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.
Emergency Towing

(P 679)

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
* Not available on all models 29

What to Do If

 

Quick Reference Guide

Models without smart entry system

The ignition switch does

not turn from 0 to q.

Why?

Models with smart entry system*1

The power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to ACCESSORY. Why?

The steering wheel may be locked.

Models without smart entry system

Try to turn the steering wheel left and right while turning the ignition key.
Models with smart entry system*1

Move the steering wheel left and right after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Models without smart entry system

The shift lever should be moved to P.

The ignition switch does

not turn from q to 0 and

I cannot remove the key.

Why?

Models with smart entry system

The power mode does not

change from ACCESSORY

to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Why?

Why does the brake pedal

This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a

pulsate slightly when

problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never

applying the brakes?

pump the brake pedal.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P556)

*1:U.S. models with manual transmission and Canadian models

30

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle. To cancel this function, slide the lever up to the unlock position.

 

Quick Reference Guide

Why do the doors lock

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are

after I unlocked the doors?

relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper

The beeper sounds when:

sound when I open the

The key is left in the ignition switch*.

driver’s door?

The power mode* is in ACCESSORY.

The exterior lights are left on.

Models with smart entry system

Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I close the door?

The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock operating range before the door completely closes.

Locking the doors and hatch (Walk away auto lock®) (P150)
* Not available on all models 31

Quick Reference Guide

Why does the beeper

The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are

sound when I start driving?

not wearing their seat belts.

Pressing the electric

Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal

parking brake switch does

depressed.

not release the parking

brake. Why?

Depressing the accelerator

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.

pedal does not release the

Check if the transmission is in P* or N. If so, select any other

parking brake

position.

automatically. Why?

Why do I hear a screeching

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle

sound when I apply the

inspected by a dealer.

brake pedal?

 

I’m seeing an amber indicator of a tire with an exclamation point. What is that?

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)* needs attention. If you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate the system.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)* (P482)
32

Models with 18 or 20 inch wheels

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane Number (PON) of 91 or higher is recommended.

Is it possible to use unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane Number (PON) of 87 or lower on this vehicle?

Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance.

 

Use of a gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to engine damage.

The use of regular unleaded gasoline can cause metallic knocking noises in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance.

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 33

34

Safe Driving

You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving

Side Airbags ………………………………..

56

Important Safety Precautions ………….

36

Side Curtain Airbags ……………………..

58

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features…………

38

Airbag System Indicators………………..

60

Safety Checklist ……………………………

39

Airbag Care …………………………………

63

Seat Belts

Child Safety

About Your Seat Belts……………………

40

Protecting Child Passengers ……………

64

Fastening a Seat Belt……………………..

44

Safety of Infants and Small Children…….

66

Seat Belt Inspection……………………….

47

Safety of Larger Children ……………….

77

Airbags

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Airbag System Components……………

48

Carbon Monoxide Gas…………………..

79

Types of Airbags …………………………..

51

Safety Labels

Front Airbags (SRS) ……………………….

51

Label Locations …………………………….

80

35

For Safe Driving

Safe Driving

 

The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.

Important Safety Precautions

Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.

Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions

 

Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.

36

Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.

Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.

To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle
Children, pets and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death.

Even if the climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system can shut off at any time.

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

 

Safe Driving

37

For Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

 

9

8

9

Safe

Driving

6

10

7

8

10

11

Safety Cage

7

Crush Zones

Seats and Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Collapsible Steering Column

6

Seat Belts

7

Front Airbags

8

Side Airbags

9

Side Curtain Airbags

10

Door Locks

11

Seat Belt Tensioners

 

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

 

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

38

uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist

Safety Checklist

 

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive.

After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the hatch are closed and locked. Locking the doors and the hatch helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the hatch.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 156

Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 193

Except 2.0 L engine models

Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraints Positions P. 196

Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 44

Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 64

1Safety Checklist

 

If the door and hatch open message appears on the driver information interface, a door and/or the hatch is not completely closed. Close all doors and the hatch tightly until the message disappears.

Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages P. 104
Safe Driving

 

39

Seat Belts

Safe Driving

 

About Your Seat Belts

 

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.

In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:

frontal impacts
side impacts
rear impacts
rollovers
Lap/shoulder seat belts
All four or five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to restrain your body.

The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 72
1About Your Seat Belts

 

WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.

Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.

If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly.

40

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:

All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
1About Your Seat Belts

 

If a passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 41

Seat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving

 

Seat Belt Reminder
The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind the driver or a front passenger or both to fasten their seat belts. If the ignition switch is turned to ON w*1 and a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the beeper will stop and the indicator will come on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is fastened.

 

The beeper will periodically sound and the

indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving

until the seat belt is fastened.

1Seat Belt Reminder

 

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1.

When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound.

The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.

Protecting Child Passengers P. 64
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

42

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags.

 

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

 

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.

If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.

During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

Safe Driving

 

43

Seat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving

 

Fastening a Seat Belt

 

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat:

Adjusting the Seats P. 193
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

 

Pull out slowly.

Correct

Seated

Posture.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

 

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt once, then push it back in.

Latch

 

Plate

Buckle

Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything.

Then smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.

About Your Seat Belts P. 40
Seat Belt Inspection P. 47
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.

44

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as

possible across your hips, then pull up on

Lap belt

the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part

fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic

as low as

possible

bones take the force of a crash and reduces

the chance of internal injuries.

4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to

remove any slack, then check that the belt

rests across the center of your chest and

over your shoulder. This spreads the forces

of a crash over the strongest bones in your

upper body.

 

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants.

Move the anchor up and down while pulling the shoulder anchor outward.
Position the anchor so that the belt rests

across the center of your chest and over your shoulder.

Pull

outward

1Fastening a Seat Belt

 

WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely.

When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door.

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time.

After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 45

Seat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving

 

Advice for Pregnant Women
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

 

Wear the shoulder belt

across the chest avoiding

the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the

belt as low as possible

across the hips.

1Advice for Pregnant Women

 

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.

To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag:

When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.
When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible.
46

Seat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Seat Belt Inspection

 

Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection

 

WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

Safe Driving

 

47

Airbags

Airbag System Components

 

Safe Driving

48

AirbagsuAirbag System Components
The front, front side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:

aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

bTwo side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

cTwo side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

dAn electronic control unit that, when the ignition switch is in ON w*1, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners, and other vehicle information. During a crash event the unit can record such information.

eAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. In addition, the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened.

fDriver’s seat position sensor. This sensor detects the driver’s seat slide position to help determine the optimal deployment of the driver’s airbag.

gWeight sensors in the front passenger’s seat. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.

hImpact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.

iAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the front passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.

jAn indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.

kA rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags.

Safe Driving

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an

ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

Continued 49

AirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving

 

Important Facts About Your Airbags
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

 

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.

50

AirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Types of Airbags

 

Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:

Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.
Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.

Front Airbags (SRS)

 

The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary restraint system.

Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

1Types of Airbags

 

The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

1Front Airbags (SRS)

During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.

Safe Driving

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued 51

AirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving

 

Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.

 

The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

1How the Front Airbags Work

 

Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

52

When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.

Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.

Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions.

Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection.

When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.

When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

 

Safe Driving

Continued 53

AirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving

 

Advanced Airbags
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.

The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor.

 

Based on information from this sensor and the

severity of the impact, the advanced airbag

Driver’s

system determines the optimal deployment of

the driver’s airbag.

Seat

Position

Sensor

1Advanced Airbags

 

If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position sensor or the passenger’s seat weight sensors, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver’s seating position or passenger’s occupant classification) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator P. 60
For the advanced front airbags to work properly, confirm that:

• The occupant is sitting in an upright position,

Passenger’s

 

Seat

Weight

Sensors

The front passenger’s advanced airbag system has weight sensors. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.

For adult size occupants, the system will automatically activate the front passenger’s airbag. If a small adult sits in the front passenger seat and the system does not recognize him/her as an adult, see

Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 61
wearing the seat belt properly and the seat back is

not excessively reclined.

• The occupant is not leaning against the door or

center console.

• The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front

of them.

• There are no objects hanging from the front

passenger’s seat.

• Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat back

pocket.

• The steering wheel and passenger’s side dashboard

are not obstructed by any object.

• No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.

• There is no child seat or other object pressing

against the rear of the seat or seat back.

• There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger’s seat.

54

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passenger’s seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passenger’s airbag. Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passenger’s seat if the airbag does not automatically deactivate.

1Advanced Airbags

 

There are no objects placed under or beside the front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 61

The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 626

Safe Driving

 

55

AirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving

 

Side Airbags

 

The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-backs.

 

Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

Housing

Location

1Side Airbags

 

Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury.

Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer.

Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.

Operation

When

inflated

Side

Airbag

When the sensors detect a moderate-to-

severe side impact, the control unit signals the

side airbag on the impact side to immediately

inflate.

56

When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag.

When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe

It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

 

Safe Driving

57

AirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Safe Driving

 

Side Curtain Airbags

 

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.

Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the

 

ceiling above the side windows on both sides

of the vehicle.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

1Side Curtain Airbags

 

To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners.

58

Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy

 

in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side

impact.

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision.

AirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Safe Driving

59

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving

 

Airbag System Indicators

 

If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the driver information interface.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
When the ignition switch is turned to

ON w*1

The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

 

WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

60

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
When the passenger front airbag off

U.S.

indicator comes on

The indicator comes on to alert you that the

Canada front passenger’s airbag has been turned off.

This occurs if the seat is empty or when the weight sensors determine that a small child or infant is on the passenger seat.

Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.

Child Safety P. 64
If the indicator is on in the event of a crash, the front passenger’s airbag will not deploy.

1Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator

 

To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm that:

The occupant is sitting in an upright position, wearing the seat belt properly and the seat back is not excessively reclined.
The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.
The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front of them.
There are no objects hanging from the front passenger’s seat.
Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat back pocket.
No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
There is no child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat or seat back.
There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat.
There are no objects placed under or beside the front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
Safe Driving

 

Continued 61

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

1Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator

 

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and

go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is

near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult,

depending on physique and posture, the system may

not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate

the front passenger’s airbag.

If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set

forth in the above bullet points on the previous page

are met.

If the above conditions are met and the indicator is

still on, then with the transmission in park, turn the

ignition off and back on.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as

possible if:

All of the above conditions are met, and the indicator comes on with an adult seated in the front passenger seat.
The seat is empty and the indicator is off.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front

seat when the indicator is on.

62

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care

 

You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.

When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-888-9-HONDA-9.

1Airbag Care

 

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.

Safe Driving

 

63

Child Safety

Safe Driving

 

Protecting Child Passengers

 

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:

An inflating front or side airbag can injure

or kill a child sitting in the front seat.

• A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver’s ability to safely control the vehicle.

• Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers

 

WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride.

64

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.
Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers

 

WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.

Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

Safety Labels P. 80
Safe Driving

 

65

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Safety of Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat.

Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag system.

Airbags P. 48
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

1Protecting Infants

 

WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.

Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child for so long as the child’s height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions before installation.

Infants never should be seated in a forward-facing position.

Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position:

The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant.

66

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Protecting Smaller Children
If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rearward-facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.

Forward-facing child seat placement

We strongly recommend placing a forward-facing child seat in a rear seating position.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.

1Protecting Smaller Children

 

WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 67

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Selecting a Child Seat
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children). Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual for proper installation instructions.

Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.

• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.

• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

1Selecting a Child Seat

 

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.

LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

68

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.

Locate the anchor marks affixed to the base

of the seat cushion.

Models with anchor covers

Marks

Pull out the anchor covers under the marks

Covers*

to expose the lower anchors.

Lower Anchors

2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then

attach the child seat to the lower anchors

according to the instructions that came

with the child seat.

u When installing the child seat, make sure

that the lower anchors are not

obstructed by the seat belt or any other

Rigid Type

object.

 

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

 

WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.

For your child’s safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Safe Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 69

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Lower Anchors

 

Flexible Type

 

Straight Top Tether Type

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Other Top Tether Type

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Retract the cargo area cover.
2 Cargo Area Cover* P. 213

Route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint and secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

 

Except 2.0 L engine models

WARNING
Using the outer rear seats’ inner anchors to secure a LATCH-compatible child seat in the center seating position may result in failure of the child seat, causing injury or death.

Only use the outer rear seats’ inner anchors to install a child seat in the center seating position if the manufacturer’s instructions expressly permit.

Except 2.0 L engine models

Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the rear center seat

Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower anchors which are used to secure a LATCH-compatible child seat. The rear center seat, however, is not equipped with anchors of any kind.

The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance between the two inner anchors is 15 inches (380 mm).

LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the rear center seat. However, a system fitted with flexible-type attachments can be installed in the center seat, provided that the manufacturer’s instructions for that system permit the use of the inner anchors with the stated spacing.

* Not available on all models
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

Before seating a child, make sure that the system is properly attached to both the lower anchors and tether anchors.

 

Safe Driving

 

Continued 71

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat.

Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
Route the seat belt through the child seat

according to the seat manufacturer’s instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle.

u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all

the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.

4. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and check that the retractor has switched modes by pulling on the webbing. It should not pull out again until it is reset by removing the latch plate from the buckle. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt

out, the lockable retractor is not

activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the

way out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

 

A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

72

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.

Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt.
Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Seat Belt

 

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 73

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether

 

Safe Driving

 

Outer Position

 

Tether Anchor Points

 

Except 2.0 L engine models

Center Position

Tether Anchor Point

A tether anchor point is provided behind each rear seating position.

If you have a child seat that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security.

Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats whether using the seat belt or lower anchors.

74

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Straight Top Tether Type in Outer Position

 

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

 

Other Top Tether Type in Outer Position

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Using an outer anchor
Retract the cargo area cover.
2 Cargo Area Cover* P. 213

Locate the appropriate tether anchor point.
Route the tether strap over the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Safe Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 75

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Straight Top Tether Type in Center Position

 

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

 

Other Top Tether Type in Center Position

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Except 2.0 L engine models

Using the center anchor
1. Retract the cargo area cover.

2 Cargo Area Cover* P. 213

2. Locate the appropriate tether anchor point and lift the cover.

3. Route the tether strap over the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

4. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.

5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.

* Not available on all models
Child SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safety of Larger Children

Protecting Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.

Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.

Checklist

• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat?

• Does the shoulder belt cross between the child’s neck and arm?

• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as

possible, touching the child’s thighs?

• Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

1Safety of Larger Children

 

WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 77

Child SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving

 

Booster Seats
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in the rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer’s recommendations.

 

Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information in this manual.
Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the seat.
Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.

1Booster Seats

 

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly.

There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.

Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.

78

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas

 

The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.

• The exhaust system may have been damaged.

• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

When you operate a vehicle with the hatch open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the hatch open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Set the fan speed to high.
Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

 

WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.

An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas.

Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.

Safe Driving

 

79

Safety Labels

Label Locations

 

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.

 

Safe

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer

for a replacement.

Driving

Dashboard

Sun Visor

U.S. models only

Canadian models

U.S. models

Reserve Tank Cap

Except 2.0 L engine models

Air Conditioner System

U.S. models

2.0 L engine models

Canadian models

80

 

Instrument Panel

This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators 82

Driver Information Interface Warning and

Information Messages 104

Gauges and Driver Information Interface

Gauges 122

Driver Information Interface 124

81

Indicators

 

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

Comes on while driving – Make sure

you turn the ignition switch to ON

the parking brake is released. Check the

(w*1, then goes off if the parking

brake fluid level.

brake has been released.

2 What to do when the indicator

Comes on when the parking brake

comes on P. 670

is applied, and goes off when it is

Comes on along with the ABS

released.

indicator – Have your vehicle checked by

U.S.

Comes on when the brake fluid

a dealer.

level is low.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)

Parking Brake

Comes on if there is a problem

Comes On or Blinks P. 670

Blinks and the parking brake and

with the brake system.

and Brake

brake system indicator (amber) comes

Canada

The beeper sounds and the

System Indicator

on at the same time – There is a

indicator comes on if you drive

(Red)

problem with the electric parking brake

with the parking brake not fully

system. The parking brake may not be

released.

(Red)

set.

Comes on for about 15 seconds

Avoid using the parking brake and have

when you pull the electric parking

your vehicle checked by a dealer

brake switch while the ignition

immediately.

switch is in LOCK (0*1.

Stays on for about 15 seconds

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)

Comes On or Blinks at the Same

when you turn the ignition switch

Time When the Brake System

to LOCK (0*1 while the electric

Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 671

parking brake is set.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

82

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

U.S.

you turn the ignition switch to ON

checked by a dealer.

(w*1, then goes off.

Comes on while driving – Avoid using

Comes on if there is a problem

the parking brake and have your vehicle

with a system related to braking

checked by a dealer immediately.

other than the conventional brake

system.

Comes on if there is a problem

with the electric parking brake

U.S.

system or the automatic brake

hold system.

Parking Brake

Canada

and Brake

Canada

System Indicator

(Amber)

(Amber)

Comes on if there is a problem

Make sure the total load is within the

with the radar sensor.

Maximum Load Limit.

Indicator may come on temporarily

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 447

when the Maximum Load Limit is

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

exceeded.

checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 83

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when
Automatic Brake

you turn the ignition switch to ON

Hold System

(w*1, then goes off.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 553

Indicator

Comes on when the automatic

brake hold system is on.

Comes on for a few seconds when

U.S.

you turn the ignition switch to ON

Automatic Brake

(w*1, then goes off.

Comes on when the automatic

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 553

Hold Indicator

brake hold is activated.

Canada

Comes on when you turn the

● Comes on while driving – Immediately

Low Oil Pressure

ignition switch to ON (w*1, and

stop in a safe place.

goes off when the engine starts.

2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Indicator

Comes on when the engine oil

Comes On P. 668

pressure is low.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

84

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Readiness codes are part of the on board

1.5 L engine models

Comes on when you turn the

diagnostics for the emissions control

ignition switch to ON (w*1, and

systems.

goes off when the engine starts, or

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 689

after several seconds if the engine

Comes on while driving – Have your

did not start. If “readiness codes”

vehicle checked by a dealer.

have not been set, it blinks five

Blinks while driving – Stop in a safe

times before it goes off.

place where there are no flammable

Malfunction

objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes

2.0 L engine models

Indicator Lamp

Comes on when you set the power

or more, and wait for it to cool down.

mode to ON, and goes off when

Then, take your vehicle to a dealer.

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

the engine starts. If “readiness

Comes On or Blinks P. 669

codes” have not been set, it blinks

five times before it goes off.

Comes on if there is a problem

with the emissions control systems.

Blinks when a misfire in the

engine’s cylinders is detected.

Comes on when you turn the

Comes on while driving – Turn off the

Charging System

ignition switch to ON (w*1, and

climate control system and rear defogger

goes off when the engine starts.

in order to reduce electricity

Indicator

Comes on when the battery is not

consumption.

charging.

2 If the Charging System Indicator

Comes On P. 668

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 85

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Shift Lever

Indicates the current shift lever

Position

2

Shifting P. 461

position.

Indicator*

M (7-speed

Comes on when 7-speed manual

manual shift

shift mode is applied.

2

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 465

mode) Indicator/

Shift Indicator*

Transmission

Blinks if the transmission system

● Blinks while driving – Avoid sudden

System

has a problem.

starts and acceleration and have your

Indicator*

vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Shift Up

Comes on when shifting up is

2

Shift Up/Down Indicators P. 467, 470

Indicator*

recommended.

Shift Down

Comes on when shifting down is

2

Shift Up/Down Indicators P. 467, 470

Indicator*

recommended.

* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Indicates 1st to 6th gear position. ●

If you shift gears very slowly, a different

gear position may be displayed for a

moment.

2 Shifting P. 468

The display can be turned ON/OFF in

customized features in driver information

interface or audio/information screen.

2 Customized Features P. 134, 350

Gear Position

Under the following conditions, gear

positions and frame borders are not

Indicator*

displayed.

– The select lever is in (R position.

– The display of gear position indicator is

turned OFF in customized features.

Under the following conditions, gear

positions are not displayed.

– The vehicle is stopped (approximately

less than 2 mph or 3 km/h)

– The select lever is in (N position.

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 87

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on and the beeper sounds

The beeper stops and the indicator goes

if you are not wearing a seat belt

off when you and the front passenger

when you turn the ignition switch

fasten their seat belts.

to ON (w*1.

Stays on after you and/or the front

Seat Belt

If the front passenger is not

passenger has fastened the seat

wearing a seat belt, the indicator

belt(s) – A detection error may have

Reminder

comes on a few seconds later.

occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle

Indicator

Blinks while driving if either you

checked by a dealer.

and/or the front passenger has not

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 42

fastened a seat belt. The beeper

sounds and the indicator blinks at

regular intervals.

Comes on when the fuel reserve is

Comes on – Refuel your vehicle as soon

running low (approximately 1.8

as possible.

Low Fuel

U.S. gal/7.0 Liter left).

Blinks – Have your vehicle checked by a

Indicator

Blinks if there is a problem with

dealer.

the fuel gauge.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

88

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

Anti-lock Brake

you turn the ignition switch to ON

checked by a dealer. With this indicator

System (ABS)

(w*1, then goes off.

on, your vehicle still has normal braking

Indicator

If it comes on at any other time,

ability but no anti-lock function.

there is a problem with the ABS.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 556

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly or does not come

you turn the ignition switch to ON

on at all – Have your vehicle checked by

(w*1, then goes off.

a dealer.

Supplemental

Comes on if a problem with any of

Restraint System

the following is detected:

Indicator

– Supplemental restraint system

– Side airbag system

– Side curtain airbag system

– Seat belt tensioner

Comes on when you turn the

Stays on constantly or does not come

Electric Power

ignition switch to ON (w*1, and

on at all – Have your vehicle checked by

Steering (EPS)

goes off when the engine starts.

a dealer.

System Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem

2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)

with the EPS system.

System Indicator Comes On P. 672

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 89

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

you turn the ignition switch to ON

checked by a dealer.

(w*1, then goes off.

2 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka

Blinks when VSA® is active.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC),

Vehicle Stability

Comes on if there is a problem

System P. 475

with the brake assist system, VSA®

AssistTM (VSA®)

System Indicator

system or hill start assist system.

Comes on if the VSA® system is

Drive a short distance at more than 12

deactivated temporarily after the

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

battery has been disconnected,

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

then re-connected.

checked by a dealer.

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w*1, then goes off.

2 VSA® On and Off P. 476

Comes on when you partially disable VSA®.
Vehicle Stability

2.0 L engine models

AssistTM (VSA®)

Comes on when you press and

2 When the drive mode is in +R mode

OFF Indicator

hold the

(VSA OFF) button while

P. 477

+R mode

is

selected.

Comes on if the VSA® system is

● Drive a short distance at more than 12

deactivated temporarily after the

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

battery has been disconnected,

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

then re-connected.

checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

90

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

Comes on while driving – Stop in a safe

you turn the ignition switch to ON

place, check tire pressures, and inflate the

(w*1.

tire(s) if necessary.

May come on briefly if the ignition

Stays on after the tires are inflated to

switch is turned to ON (w*1 and

the recommended pressures – The

the vehicle is not moved within 45

system needs to be calibrated.

seconds, to indicate the calibration

2 TPMS Calibration P. 483

process is not yet complete.

Comes on and stays on when:

U.S.

– One or more tires’ pressures are

models

Low Tire

determined to be significantly

low.

Pressure/TPMS

– The system has not been

Indicator

calibrated.

Blinks for about one minute, and

Blinks and remains on – Have your

then stays on if there is a problem

vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle

with the TPMS, or when a spare

is fitted with a spare tire*, get your regular

tire* is temporarily installed.

tire repaired or replaced and put back on

your vehicle as soon as you can.

Comes on if the TPMS is

Drive a short distance at more than 12

deactivated temporarily after the

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

battery has been disconnected,

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

then re-connected.

checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 91

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on along with a beep

While the indicator is on, press the

when a problem is detected. A

(display/information) button to see the

system message on the driver

message again.

information interface appears at

Refer to the Indicators information in this

System Message

the same time.

chapter when a system message appears

on the driver information interface. Take

Indicator

the appropriate action for the message.

The driver information interface does not

return to the normal screen unless the

warning is canceled, or the

button

is pressed.

Blinks when you operate the turn

Does not blink or blinks rapidly

Turn Signal and

signal lever.

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 598, 602

Hazard Warning

Blink along with all turn signals

Indicators

when you press the hazard

warning button.

High Beam

Comes on when the high beam

Indicator

headlights are on.

Comes on when the light switch

If you remove the key from the ignition

Lights On

in a position other than OFF or

switch*1 while the exterior lights are on, a

Indicator

when the switch is set to AUTO

chime sounds when the driver’s door is

and the exterior lights come on.

opened.

92

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Fog Light

Comes on when the fog lights are

2 Fog Lights* P. 180

on.

Indicator*

Auto High-Beam

Comes on when all the operating

conditions of the Auto high-beam

2 Auto High-Beam P. 181

Indicator

are met.

Comes on when each drive mode

is selected by drive mode switch.

Drive Mode

2 Drive Mode Switch P. 473

Indicator*

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 93

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message*2

Blinks if the immobilizer system

Blinks – You cannot start the engine. Turn

Models without

cannot recognize the key

the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1, pull the

smart entry system

information.

key out*2, and then insert the key and turn

it to ON (w*1 again.

Repeatedly blinks – The system may be

malfunctioning. Have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add

other devices to it. Electrical problems can

occur.

Immobilizer

Models with smart

System Indicator

entry system

Indicator

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*2:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the ignition on.

94

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Blinks when the security system

Security System

alarm has been set.

2

Security System Alarm P. 164

Alarm Indicator

Indicator

Comes on when ECON mode is

ECON Mode

on.

2

ECON Mode* P. 472

Indicator*

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 95

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

when you turn the ignition switch

checked by a dealer.

to ON (w*1, then goes off.

Road Departure

Comes on if there is a problem

with the RDM system.

Mitigation (RDM)

Indicator

Comes on if the RDM is

Drive a short distance at more than 12

deactivated temporarily after the

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

battery has been disconnected,

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

then re-connected.

checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

96

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when the RDM system ●

Indicator may come on temporarily when

shuts itself off.

passing through an enclosed space, such

as a tunnel.

The area around the radar sensor is

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

vehicle in a safe place, and wipe the debris

off with a soft cloth. Indicator may take

some time to go off after the radar sensor

is cleaned.

Road Departure

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

Mitigation (RDM)

the indicator does not go off even after

Indicator

you have cleaned the sensor cover.

2 Radar Sensor P. 548

Stays on – The temperature inside the

camera is too high.

Use the climate control system to cool

down the camera.

The system activates when the

temperature inside the camera cools

down.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 546

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 97

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when the RDM system

Stays on – The area around the camera is

shuts itself off.

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

vehicle in a safe place, and wipe the debris

off with a soft cloth.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 546

Road Departure

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

the indicator and message come back on

Mitigation (RDM)

after you cleaned the area around the

Indicator

camera.

Indicator may come on

Make sure the total load is within the

temporarily when the Maximum

Maximum Load Limit.

Load Limit is exceeded.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 447

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

98

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

Comes on while driving – Have your

you turn the ignition switch to ON

vehicle checked by a dealer.

(w*1, then goes off.

Comes on if there is a problem

with ACC with Low Speed

Follow*.

Adaptive Cruise

Comes on if the ACC with Low

Drive a short distance at more than 12

Control (ACC)

Speed Follow* is deactivated

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

with Low Speed

temporarily after the battery has

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

Follow* Indicator

been disconnected, then re-

checked by a dealer.

(Amber)

connected.

Indicator may come on

Make sure the total load is within the

temporarily when the Maximum

Maximum Load Limit.

Load Limit is exceeded.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 447

ACC with Low Speed Follow* has

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

been automatically canceled.

checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 99

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Adaptive Cruise

Comes on when you press the

Control (ACC)

MAIN button.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

with Low Speed

Low Speed Follow* P. 501

Follow* Indicator

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

(Green)

Lane Keeping

Comes on for a few seconds when

● Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

you turn the ignition switch to ON

checked by a dealer.

Assist System

(w*1, then goes off.

(LKAS) Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem

(Amber)

with the LKAS.

Lane Keeping

Comes on when you press the

Assist System

MAIN button.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

(LKAS) Indicator

P. 533

(Green)

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on for a few seconds when

Stays on constantly without the

you turn the ignition switch to ON

CMBSTM off – Have your vehicle checked

(w*1, then goes off.

by a dealer.

Collision

Comes on when you deactivate

2 Collision Mitigation Braking

the CMBSTM. A driver information

SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 491

Mitigation

interface message appears for five

Braking

seconds.

SystemTM

Comes on if there is a problem

(CMBSTM)

with the CMBSTM.

Indicator

Comes on if the CMBSTM is

Drive a short distance at more than 12

deactivated temporarily after the

mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go

battery has been disconnected,

off. If it does not, have your vehicle

then re-connected.

checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 101

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when the CMBSTM

Stays on – The area around the camera is

shuts itself off.

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with

a soft cloth.

Collision

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 546

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

Mitigation

the indicator does not go off even after

Braking

you cleaned the camera.

SystemTM

(CMBSTM)

Stays on – The temperature inside the

Indicator

camera is too high. Use the climate control

system to cool down the camera. The

system activates when the temperature

inside the camera cools down.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 546

102

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Message

Comes on when the CMBSTM

Indicator may come on temporarily when

system shuts itself off.

passing through an enclosed space, such

as a tunnel.

The area around the radar sensor is

blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

vehicle in a safe place and wipe the debris

Collision

off with a soft cloth. Indicator may take

Mitigation

some time to go off after the radar sensor

Braking

is cleaned.

SystemTM

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

(CMBSTM)

the indicator does not go off even after

Indicator

you have cleaned the sensor cover.

2 Radar Sensor P. 548

Indicator may come on

Make sure the total load is within the

temporarily when the Maximum

Maximum Load Limit.

Load Limit is exceeded.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 447

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle

checked by a dealer.

Instrument Panel

 

103

 

Instrument Panel

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

 

The following messages appear only on the driver information interface. Press the (display/information) button to see the message again with the system message indicator on.

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if any door or the hatch is not completely

Disappears when all doors and the hatch are closed.

closed.

Appears if any door or the hatch is opened while

driving. The beeper sounds.

Appears when the washer fluid is low.

Refill the washer fluid.

Canadian models

2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 593

Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due
soon.

2

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver

Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and

Information Interface P. 575

Maintenance Past Due follow.

Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on

● Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

the battery.

2

Checking the Battery P. 620

104

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets

2 Overheating P. 666

abnormally high.

Continuously

Continuously variable transmission models

variable

Appears while you are customizing the settings and

transmission models

the shift lever is moved out of (P.

Manual transmission models

Appears while you are customizing the settings and

2 Customized Features P. 134

Manual transmission

the parking brake is released.

models

Continuously

Appears if the automatic brake hold is automatically

● Immediately depress the brake pedal.

variable

canceled while it is in operation.

transmission models

Manual transmission

models

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 105

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when the automatic brake hold system is

Automatic Brake Hold P. 553

turned off.

2

Appears when the automatic brake hold button is

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.

Instrument

variable

pressed without wearing the driver’s seat belt.

2

Automatic Brake Hold P. 553

Continuously

Appears when the automatic brake hold button is

Press the automatic brake hold button with the brake

Panel

transmission models

pressed without depressing the brake pedal while

pedal depressed.

the automatic brake hold is in operation.

2

Automatic Brake Hold P. 553

Manual transmission

models

Appears when the parking brake is applied

2

Automatic Brake Hold P. 553

automatically while it is in operation.

2

Parking Brake P. 549

 

106

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Continuously

● Appears when the electric parking brake switch is

● Appears while driving – Press the electric parking

variable

pressed without depressing the brake pedal while

brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.

transmission models

the electric parking brake is in operation.

2 Parking Brake P. 549

Manual transmission

PanelInstrument

models

 

Continued 107

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the auto high-

Manually operate the headlight switch.

beam.

If you are driving with the high-beam headlights when

this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams.

Appears if the temperature inside the front sensor

Use the climate control system to cool down the camera.

Instrument

camera is too high and some driver assist systems

Disappears – The camera has been cooled down and

cannot be activated.

the systems are activated normally.

Panel

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 546

is blocked by dirt, mud, etc and be prevented from

safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.

Appears if the area around the front sensor camera

When the front window gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a

detecting a vehicle in front.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message

May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,

does not disappear even after you cleaned the area

snow, fog, etc.)

around the camera.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 546

Appears if anything covers the radar sensor cover

When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a

and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in

safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. The

front.

message may take some time to go off.

May appear when driving in bad weather (rain,

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message

snow, fog, etc.)

does not disappear even after you clean the sensor cover.

2 Radar Sensor P. 548

 

108

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when ACC has been automatically

You can resume the set speed after the condition that

canceled.

caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+ button.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

Instrument

2

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply

a vehicle in front of you.

the brakes, change lanes, etc.)

P. 491

Panel

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

Appears when ACC is canceled due to excessive

Reduce the speed, then reset ACC.

high vehicle speed.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too high

Reduce the speed, then set ACC.

for you to set ACC.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

 

* Not available on all models Continued 109

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when ACC is canceled due to excessive low

Raise the speed, then reset ACC.

vehicle speed.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

Instrument

Appears when the speed of the vehicle is too low

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

Raise the speed, then set ACC.

for you to set ACC.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

Panel

Appears when the distance between your vehicle

ACC has been automatically canceled.

and the vehicle ahead of you is too close while ACC

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

is in operation.

Follow* P. 501

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC cannot be set.

distance between your vehicle and the vehicle

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

ahead of you is too close.

Follow* P. 501

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

Appears when the driver’s seat belt is unfastened

ACC has been automatically canceled.

while your vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC cannot be set.

driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

 

* Not available on all models
IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Press the RES/+ or –/SET button or depress the

Appears when the vehicle ahead of you resumes

driving, after your vehicle has been stopped

accelerator pedal to resume.

automatically by ACC.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

Appears when the vehicle is stopped on a very steep

ACC has been automatically canceled.

slope while ACC is in operation.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

● Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

● ACC cannot be set.

vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

Appears when the parking brake is applied

ACC has been automatically canceled.

automatically while ACC is in operation.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

2

Parking Brake P. 549

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC cannot be set.

parking brake is applied.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

2

Parking Brake P. 549

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 111

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

2.0 L engine models

Appears when pressing the RES/+ or –/SET button

ACC cannot be set.

while the VSA® is completely disabled.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

2 When the drive mode is in +R mode P. 477

Instrument

Appears if the VSA® or traction control function

ACC has been automatically canceled.

operates while ACC is in operation.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* P. 501

Panel

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

 

* Not available on all models
IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Continuously

Appears when the shift lever is moved into any

ACC has been automatically canceled.

variable

position other than (D or (S while ACC is in

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

transmission models

operation.

Follow* P. 501

transmission models

shift lever is in any position other than (D or (S.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

Instrument

Continuously

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC cannot be set.

variable

Follow* P. 501

Panel

Continuously

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the

ACC cannot be set.

variable

vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is depressed.

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed

transmission models

Follow* P. 501

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

Manual transmission

models

 

* Not available on all models Continued 113

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Continuously

Appears if ACC is canceled while your vehicle is

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

variable

automatically stopped by ACC.

transmission models

Instrument

Manual transmission

Appears when pressing the RES/+ or –/SET button

ACC cannot be set.

models

while the vehicle is moving and the clutch pedal is

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

Panel

depressed.

Manual transmission

Appears when the clutch pedal is depressed while

ACC has been automatically canceled.

models

ACC is in operation.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 518

 

* Not available on all models
IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages

Message

Condition

Explanation

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 533

lane. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected

2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 541

lane.

You can change the setting for the road departure

mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only

When you selected Warning Only

can be selected.

– The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the

2 Customized Features P. 134, 350

vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

When you selected Normal or Wide

– The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the

vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane. The system

also steers the vehicle to help you remain within

your driving lane.

Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper

Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.

sounds simultaneously.

Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS

If any other system indicators come on, such as the VSA®,

button is pressed, but there is a problem with a

ABS and brake system, take appropriate action.

system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels

2 Indicators P. 82

automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 115

 

Instrument Panel

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Models without smart entry system

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when you open the driver’s door while the

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0, then remove the

ignition key is in ACCESSORY (q.

key.

Appears when you open the driver’s door while the

Remove the key from the ignition switch.

ignition key is in LOCK (0.

Appears when the ignition key is turned to

ACCESSORY (q from ON (w. (The driver’s door is

closed.)

 

116

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Models with smart entry system

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Continuously

Appears after you set the power mode to

variable

ACCESSORY or ON.

transmission models

Canadian models

Appears after you unlock and open the driver’s

2 Starting the Engine P. 454

PanelInstrument

Manual transmission

door.

models

Canadian models

Appears when the steering wheel is locked.

● Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the

ENGINE START/STOP button.

 

Continued 117

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP

Continuously

U.S. models

button to turn the engine off without the shift lever

Move the shift lever to (P. The power mode changes to

variable

transmission models

in (P.

VEHICLE OFF.

Canadian models

Instrument

Move the shift lever to (P, then press the ENGINE

START/STOP button twice.

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

Panel

Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the

Change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

power mode is in ACCESSORY.

2 ENGINE START/STOP Button* P. 172

Appears when you close the door with the power

Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back

mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside

inside the vehicle and close the door.

the vehicle.

2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 174

Appears when the smart entry remote battery

becomes weak.

2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 622

 

* Not available on all models
IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too

Bring the back of the smart entry remote into contact

weak to start the engine or the key is not within

with the ENGINE START/STOP button.

operating range to start the engine.

2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 660

A beeper sounds six times.

U.S.

Appears when the starter system has a problem.

As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE

Instrument

*

START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing

the brake pedal and clutch pedal (manual transmission

only), manually start the engine.

Panel

Canada

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the

Appears constantly – Have your vehicle checked by a

smart entry system or push button starting system.

dealer.

 

* Not available on all models Continued 119

 

Instrument Panel

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Models with LED headlight

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the headlights.

Appears while driving – The headlights may not be on.

When conditions allow you to drive safely, have your

vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

1.5 L engine models

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if you press the ENGINE START/STOP

button while the vehicle is moving.

2 Emergency Engine Stop P. 661

2.0 L engine models

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with a system related

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

to Rev Match System while the system is activated by

2 Rev Match System P. 469

customization.

Appears if there is a problem with the adaptive

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Your vehicle will

damper system.

have normal damping ability without the adaptive

damper feature.

Appears if the drive mode cannot be changed due to

certain situations, such as a system error or adverse

2 Drive Mode Switch P. 473

driving conditions.

 

120

IndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages
Models with remote engine starter

 

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s

door while the engine is running by one-way smart

2 Remote Engine Start* P. 456

entry remote.

 

Instrument Panel

* Not available on all models 121

Gauges and Driver Information Interface

Instrument Panel

 

Gauges

 

Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.

They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON w*1.

Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.

Tachometer
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Gauges

Press the (display/information) button

repeatedly until the icon is shown on the driver information interface. Press ENTER, then press and hold it again. The speedometer reading and the displayed measurements will switch between mph and km/h.

 

1Fuel Gauge

NOTICE

You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.

1Temperature Gauge

NOTICE

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal.

Overheating P. 666
122

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges
Shift Up Backlight*/Shift Up Alarm*
The shift up backlight blinks and the alarm

 

Shift Up Backlight

sounds when the tachometer reading

approaches the red zone.

1Shift Up Backlight*/Shift Up Alarm*

 

You can use the customized features to turn the shift up backlight feature and the shift up alarm feature on and off.

Customized Features P. 350

Instrument Panel

* Not available on all models 123

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Driver Information Interface

 

The driver information interface shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature indicator, and other gauges.

It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.

 

Instrument Panel

124

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Switching the Display
Main displays

Press the

(display/information) button and press

or

to change the

display. Press ENTER to see detailed information.

 

1Switching the Display

 

You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents using the audio/information screen.

Customizing the Meter P. 256

1.5 L engine models

(Display/ Information) Button

Press , ,

or .

Press ENTER.

Instrument Panel

Range & Fuel Turbo Meter Navigation* & Maintenance Customize* Audio

Compass* MinderTM

Mail*

Average Speed &

Warning

Phone

Elapsed Time

Messages

Optional contents*1:

Speed Unit &

Disp OFF

*1:You can add the contents using the audio/information screen.

* Not available on all models Continued 125

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

2.0 L engine models

 

Instrument Panel

(Display/ Information) Button

Press , ,

or .

Press ENTER.

Accelerator

Turbo Meter Rev Indicators

G-Meter

Stopwatch

Range &

Navigation*

Position/Braking

Fuel

& Compass*

Pressure Meter

Mail

Average Speed

Warning

Phone

Audio

Maintenance

& Elapsed Time

Messages

MinderTM

Optional contents*1:

Speed Unit &

Disp OFF

*1:You can add the contents using the audio/information screen.

* Not available on all models
Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Trip computer
Press the (TRIP) knob to change the display.

 

Odometer

Trip A

Trip B

Outside temperature

(TRIP)

Knob

Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

 

1Trip Meter

 

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the knob.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 127

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km. The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.

Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy.

Elapsed Time*
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Average Speed*
Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.

Maintenance MinderTM P. 573
1Average Fuel Economy

 

You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
1Elapsed Time*

You can change when to reset the elapsed time.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
1Average Speed*

You can change when to reset the average speed.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
* Not available on all models
Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading seems incorrect.

Use the driver information interface’s customized features to correct the temperature.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

Turbo Meter
When the turbo is producing boost, this meter indicates boost pressure is building.

1Outside Temperature

 

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 129

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Navigation*
Compass*
Shows the compass screen.

Turn-by-Turn Directions
When driving guidance is provided by the navigation system* or Android Auto, turn-by-turn directions to your destination appear.

Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Android Auto P. 316
Audio
Shows the current audio information.

Audio System Basic Operation P. 233, 251
Mail*
Shows the current mail information.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 410
Phone
Shows the current phone information.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 383, 410
1Navigation*

 

You can select whether the turn-by-turn display comes on or not during the route guidance.

Customized Features P. 350
* Not available on all models
Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
G-Meter*
Displays the strength (G) and direction of the load that is applied to the vehicle during driving.

Braking Pressure Meter*
Displays the brake pressure in PSI when the brake is applied.

Accelerator Position Meter*
Displays the accelerator position in degrees of %.

Rev Indicators*
Light up from left to right according to engine

 

speed.

Rev Indicators

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 131

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Stopwatch*
Measures the lap time, and displays the previously measured times, split time and the fastest lap time.

 

1Stopwatch*

 

Be sure to use this measurement function only where and when it is safe to do so.

Lap time is displayed from 00:00.00 to 9:59:59.99.

Instrument Panel

3 Button

Button

Button
(Hang-up/Back) Button

ENTER Button

Button

Measuring LAP Time

Press the ENTER button to display the lap time measurement screen.
Press the ENTER button to start measurement.
Press the ENTER button again to stop measurement.
u To measure the time per lap, press the 3 / 4 button at the completion of each lap.

u To return to the Stopwatch screen,

press the (Hang-up/back) button.

 

* Not available on all models
Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Press

 

Button

Press

Button

Checking/Clearing history
To check history, press the button (when lap time is not running) to change the display, then press the 3 / 4 button to scroll through lap times.
u A maximum of 20 lap times can be stored at a time.

To clear the history, press and hold the 3 / 4 button when lap time is not running.
To return to the lap time measurement screen, press the button.
To return to the Stopwatch screen, press
the (Hang-up/back) button.

 

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 133

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Models with color audio system

 

Customized Features
Use the driver information interface to customize certain features.

How to customize
Select the Vehicle Settings screen by pressing the button while the ignition switch is in ON w, and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Select Vehicle Settings, then press the ENTER button.

 

Driver information interface:

Goes to Vehicle Settings.

Button ENTER Button
Press to scroll upwards.

Press to set your selection.

Button

Button

4

Press to go to Vehicle Menu.

Press to scroll downwards.

1Customized Features

 

To customize other features, press the 3 / 4 button.

List of customizable options P. 137
Example of customization settings P. 141
Put the transmission into (P before you attempt to change any customized setting.

134

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Customization flow
Press the button.

 

Vehicle Settings

ENTER

 

ENTER

3

4

TPMS Calibration

3

4

Driver Assist System Setup ENTER

 

3

4

Meter Setup

ENTER

3

4

3

 

4

 

3

 

4

Forward Collision Warning Distance

 

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep

 

Road Departure Mitigation Setting

 

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

 

Language Selection

 

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

 

“Trip A” Reset Timing

 

“Trip B” Reset Timing

 

Adjust Alarm Volume

 

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

 

Speed/Distance Units

 

Tachometer

 

Instrument Panel

Continued 135

 

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Instrument Panel

 

3

4

ENTER

3

4

Lighting Setup

ENTER

 

3

4

Door Setup

ENTER

 

3

4

Maintenance Reset

 

3

4

Default All

 

3

4

Exit

 

3

 

4

 

3

 

4

Interior Light Dimming Time

 

Headlight Auto OFF Timer

 

Auto Light Sensitivity

 

Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity

 

Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON

 

Auto Door Lock

 

Auto Door Unlock

 

Key And Remote Unlock Mode Keyless Lock Answer Back Security Relock Timer

 

136

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

List of customizable options
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

TPMS

Calibrates the TPMS.

Cancel/Calibrate

Calibration

Forward Collision

Changes the distance at which CMBSTM alerts.

Long/Normal*1/Short

Warning Distance

Driver Assist

ACC Forward Vehicle

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a

ON/OFF*1

Detect Beep

vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC range.

System

Road Departure

Changes the setting for the road departure

Normal*1/Wide/Warning

Setup

Mitigation Setting

mitigation system.

Only

Lane Keeping Assist

Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is

ON/OFF*1

Suspend Beep

suspended.

*1:Default Setting

 

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 137

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Language Selection

Changes the displayed language.

English*1/Français/Español

Adjust Outside Temp.

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F

Display

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,

When Refueled/IGN OFF/

“Trip A” Reset Timing

average fuel economy A, average speed A, and

Manually Reset*1

elapsed time A.

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,

When Refueled/IGN OFF/

Meter Setup

“Trip B” Reset Timing

average fuel economy B, average speed B, and

Manually Reset*1

elapsed time B.

Adjust Alarm Volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers,

High/Mid*1/Low

warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Speed/Distance Units

Selects the trip computer units.

mph∙miles*1/km/h∙km

Tachometer

Selects whether the tachometer is displayed on the

ON*1/OFF

driver information interface.

*1:Default Setting

 

138

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Interior Light Dimming

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on

60sec/30sec*1/15sec

Time

after you close the doors.

Headlight Auto OFF

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay

60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec

Timer

on after you close the driver’s door.

Lighting

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Setup

Auto Interior

Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the

instrument panel when the headlight switch is in the

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Illumination Sensitivity

AUTO position.

Auto Headlight ON With

Changes the settings for the wiper operation when

the headlights automatically come on while the

ON*1/OFF

Wiper ON

headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

*1: Default Setting

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 139

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Auto Door Lock

Changes the setting for when the doors

With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift

automatically lock.

from P/OFF

When Driver’s Door Opens*1/

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors

When Shifting Into Park/

automatically unlock.

When Ignition Switched

OFF/OFF

Door Setup

Key And Remote Unlock

Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock

Driver Door*1/ All Doors

Mode

on the first operation of the remote or ignition key.

Keyless Lock Answer

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

ON*1/OFF

Back

LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and

Security Relock Timer

the security system to set after you unlock the

90sec/60sec/30sec*1

vehicle without opening any door.

Maintenance

Cancels/Resets the engine oil life display when you

Cancel/All Due Items

Reset

have performed the maintenance service.

Default All

Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as

Cancel/Set

default.

 

*1: Default Setting

140

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the “Trip A” Reset Timing setting to When Refueled are shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” Reset Timing is Manually Reset.

Press the button to select Vehicle Settings, then press the ENTER button.

Instrument Panel

Press the 3 / 4 button until Meter Setup appears on the display.
Press the ENTER button.

u Language Selection appears first in the

display.

Continued 141

 

Instrument Panel

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Press the 3 / 4 button until “Trip A” Reset Timing appears on the display, then press the ENTER button.
u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select When Refueled, IGN OFF, Manually Reset, or Exit.

Press the 3 / 4 button and select When Refueled, then press the ENTER button. u The When Refueled Setup screen
appears, then the display returns to the customization menu screen.

Press the 3 / 4 button until Exit appears on the display, then press the ENTER button.
Repeat Step 6 until you return to the normal screen.

142

Controls

This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock …………………………………………..

144

Opening and Closing the Windows …

167

Brightness Control ………………………

187

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Moonroof* ………………………………….

170

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror*

Key Types and Functions ………………

145

Operating the Switches Around the

Button …………………………………….

188

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength* ..

146

Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel ……….

189

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Ignition Switch* ………………………….

171

Adjusting the Mirrors

Outside ……………………………………

147

ENGINE START/STOP Button*………..

172

Interior Rearview Mirror ……………….

190

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Ignition Switch and Power Mode

Power Door Mirrors …………………….

192

Inside ………………………………………

156

Comparison ……………………………..

175

Adjusting the Seats ……………………..

193

Childproof Door Locks …………………

158

Turn Signals ……………………………….

176

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ……….

159

Light Switches…………………………….

177

Items …………………………………………

201

Hatch ………………………………………….

160

Fog Lights* ………………………………..

180

Climate Control System

Security System

Daytime Running Lights ……………….

180

Using Automatic Climate Control ….

217

Immobilizer System ……………………..

163

Auto High-Beam …………………………

181

Automatic Climate Control Sensors……

224

Security System Alarm………………….

164

Wipers and Washers ……………………

184

* Not available on all models 143

Clock

Adjusting the Clock

 

You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch in ON w*1.

Adjusting the Time

1Adjusting the Clock

 

Models with navigation system

The clock is automatically updated through the audio system.

Controls

MENU/CLOCK Button

 

Models with color audio system

Using the MENU/CLOCK button
Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button. u Adjust Clock is selected.
Rotate to change hour, then press .
Rotate to change minute, then press
.

To enter the selection, rotate and select Set, then press .

All models

You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.

Customized Features P. 343, 350
1Using the MENU/CLOCK button

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select. Press to enter.

Models with Display Audio

 

Using the Settings menu on the audio/ information screen
Select Settings.
Select Clock.
Select Clock Adjustment.
Select 3 or 4 to change hour.
Select 3 or 4 to change minute, then select OK.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen

You can turn the clock display on and off.

Customized Features P. 350
You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock displayed on the upper right corner of the display.

Touch the clock on the display for a few seconds.
Select Clock Adjustment.
Select 3 or 4 to change hour.
Select 3 or 4 to change minute, then select OK.
You cannot adjust the time while the vehicle is moving.

144

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key Types and Functions

 

This vehicle comes with the following keys:

Ignition key with

Smart entry remote

Smart entry remote with

remote transmitter

remote engine starter

 

Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and to lock and unlock the doors and hatch. You can also use the remote transmitter to lock and unlock the doors and hatch.

Built-in Key*
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the

 

Release Knob

doors when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/ unlock operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, slide the release knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall

the built-in key, push the built-in key into the Built-in Key

smart entry remote until it clicks.

1Key Types and Functions

 

All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft.

Immobilizer System P. 163
Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the keys:

Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in locations with high temperature or high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids, dust and sand.
Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.

If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter may not work.

If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.

Models with remote engine starter

You can remotely start the engine using the smart entry remote with remote engine starter.

Remote Engine Start* P. 456
Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 145

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*
Controls

 

Key Number Tag
Contains a number that you will need if you

 

purchase a replacement key.

1Key Number Tag

 

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle.

If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer.

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*

 

The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/ unlocking the doors and hatch, or to start the engine.

In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors and hatch, or starting the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:

Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.
1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*

Communication between the smart entry remote and the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s battery.

Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use.

The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers.

* Not available on all models
Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*

When you carry the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and hatch.

 

You can lock/unlock the doors and hatch within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle or hatch release button.

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

 

If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior light comes on when you unlock the doors.

No doors opened: The light fades out after 30 seconds.

Doors relocked: The light goes off immediately.

Interior Lights P. 201
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System* If you do not open a door or the hatch within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the smart entry system, the doors and hatch will automatically relock.

You can lock or unlock doors using the smart entry system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 147

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls

 

Locking the doors and hatch
Door Lock Button

 

Lock Button

Press the door lock button on the front door or on the hatch.

u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds; all the doors and hatch lock; and the security system sets.

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*

 

Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and hatch while someone else with the remote is within range.
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the smart entry remote is within range.
If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors.
After locking the door, you have up to two seconds during which you can pull the door handle to confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait at least two seconds before gripping the handle, otherwise the door will not unlock.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors and hatch with the smart entry remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too close to the door and door glass.
The light flash, beep and door unlock mode settings can be customized using the audio/information screen.

Customized Features P. 350
* Not available on all models
Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Unlocking the doors and hatch
Grab the driver’s door handle:

 

u The driver’s door unlocks.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

Grab the front passenger’s door handle:

u All doors and the hatch unlock.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

Press the hatch release button.

Hatch Release Button

u The hatch unlocks.

u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

2 Opening/Closing the Hatch P. 161

 

Controls

 

Continued 149

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls

 

The activation range of the auto lock function is about 5 feet (1.5 m)

 

Locking the doors and hatch (Walk
away auto lock®)

When you walk away from the vehicle while carrying the smart entry remote, the doors and hatch will automatically lock.

The auto lock function activates when all doors and hatch are closed, and the smart entry remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door handle.

Exit vehicle while carrying smart entry remote and close door(s).

While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the vehicle.
u The beeper sounds; the auto lock function will be activated.

Carry the smart entry remote beyond about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside this range for 2 or more seconds. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors and hatch will then lock.

1Locking the doors and hatch (Walk away auto lock®)

 

The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can be set to ON using the audio/information screen.

If you set the auto lock function to ON using the audio/information screen, only the remote transmitter that was used to unlock the driver’s door prior to the setting change can activate auto lock.

Customized Features P. 350
After the auto lock function has been activated, when you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range, the indicator on the smart entry remote will continue to flash until the doors are locked.

When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors and hatch will automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds.

When you open a door or the hatch after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will be delayed until all doors and hatch are closed.

150

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
To temporarily deactivate the function:

Set the power mode to OFF.
Open the driver’s door.
Using the master door lock switch, operate the lock as follows:
Lock Unlock Lock Unlock.

u The beeper sounds and the function is deactivated.

To restore the function:

Set the power mode to ON.
Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock function.
With the smart entry remote on you, move out of the auto lock function operation range.
Open any door.
1Locking the doors and hatch (Walk away auto lock®)

 

Under the following circumstances, the auto lock function will not activate:

The smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. uThe beeper will not sound.
The smart entry remote is taken out of its operational range before all the doors and hatch are closed.
uThe beeper will sound.

The auto lock function does not operate when any of the following conditions are met.

The smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.
A door, hatch or the hood is not closed.
The power mode is set to any mode other than OFF.
The smart entry remote is not located within a radius of about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of the vehicle and close the doors.
Controls

 

Continued 151

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Controls

1Locking the doors and hatch (Walk away auto lock®)

 

Auto lock function operation stop beeper After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for approximately two seconds in the following cases.

The smart entry remote is put inside the vehicle through a window.
You are located too close to the vehicle.
The smart entry remote is put inside the hatch. If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the smart entry remote. Then, open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once.
152

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter

 

Lock Button

 

LED

Unlock Button

Locking the doors and hatch Press the lock button.
Once:

u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors and hatch lock, and the security system sets.

Twice (within five seconds after the first push):

u The beeper sounds and verifies the security system is set.

Unlocking the doors and hatch
Press the unlock button.

Once:

u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door unlocks.

Twice:

If you do not open a door or the hatch within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors and hatch will automatically relock.

You can change the relock timer setting.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
Models without smart entry system

The remote transmitter will not work when the key is in the ignition switch.

Models with smart entry system

You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

All models

The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.

Controls

 

u The remaining doors and hatch unlock.

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is

open.

If the distance at which the remote transmitter works

varies, the battery is probably low.

If the LED does not come on when you press a

button, the battery is dead.

Replacing the Button Battery P. 622
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
Continued 153

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
If the lock or unlock button of the remote transmitter does not work, use the key instead.

Replacing the Button Battery P. 622
Fully insert the key and turn it.

 

Lock

 

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

 

When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the other doors and hatch lock at the same time. When unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the hatch.

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
Controls

Unlock

154

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking a Door Without Using a Key
If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using the key, you can lock the door without it.

Locking the front doors

Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door.

■ Locking the rear doors

Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

Lockout prevention system

Models without smart entry system

The doors and hatch cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch.

Models with smart entry system

 

The doors and hatch cannot be locked when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

 

When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors and hatch lock at the same time.

Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle.

Controls

 

155

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls

 

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Using the Lock Tab

■ Locking a door

 

To Lock

Lock Tab

Push the lock tab forward.

■ Unlocking a door

Pull the lock tab rearward.

To Unlock

1Using the Lock Tab

 

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, all of the other doors and the hatch lock at the same time.

When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.

156

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
Pull the front door inner handle.

 

u The door unlocks and opens in one

Inner motion.

Handle

Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors.

To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door.

u This setting works for one time only.

Models with color audio system

 

If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to OFF using the driver information interface.

Customized Features P. 134
Models with Display Audio

 

If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using the audio/information screen.

Customized Features P. 350
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

 

The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However, this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.

Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided.

Childproof Door Locks P. 158
Controls

 

Continued 157

Locking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
Controls

 

Using the Master Door Lock Switch
Press the master door lock switch in as shown

To Unlock

to lock or unlock all the doors and the hatch.

To Lock

 

Master Door

Lock Switch

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch

 

When you lock/unlock either of the front doors using the master door lock switch, all the other doors and the hatch lock/unlock at the same time.

Childproof Door Locks

 

The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab.

Setting the Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks

To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle.

Unlock

 

Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock

position, and close the door.

When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.

Lock

158

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

 

Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.

Auto Door Locking
Drive lock mode
All doors and the hatch lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

Auto Door Unlocking
Driver’s door open mode
All doors and the hatch unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

 

Models with color audio system

You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the driver information interface.

Customized Features P. 134
Models with Display Audio

You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the audio/ information screen.

Customized Features P. 350
Controls

 

159

Hatch

Controls

 

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Hatch

 

Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the hatch before opening or closing it.

Open the hatch all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the hatch may begin to close under its own weight.

Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the hatch to close.
Keep the hatch closed while driving to:

u Avoid possible damage.

u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.

Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 79
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Hatch

 

WARNING
Anyone caught in the path of a hatch that is being opened or closed can be seriously injured.

Make sure that all people are clear of the hatch before opening or closing it.

Be careful not to hit your head on the hatch or to put your hands between the hatch and the cargo area when closing the hatch.

When you are storing or picking up luggage from the cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.

Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden acceleration, or a crash.

160

uuHatchuOpening/Closing the Hatch

Opening/Closing the Hatch

 

Hatch Release Button

 

Inner Handle

When all the doors are unlocked or press the hatch unlock button on the remote transmitter, the hatch is unlocked. Press the hatch release button and lift open the hatch.

Models with smart entry system

If you are carrying the smart entry remote, you do not have to unlock the hatch before opening it.

All models

 

To close the hatch, grab the inner handle, pull the hatch down, and push it closed from outside.

If you close the hatch when the driver’s door is locked, the hatch locks automatically.

u Some exterior lights flash.

1Opening/Closing the Hatch

 

Models with smart entry system

Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, you can unlock the hatch while someone else with the remote is within range.
Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the cargo area and close the hatch when all the doors are locked. The beeper sounds and the hatch cannot be locked.
Controls

 

Continued 161

HatchuOpening/Closing the Hatch
Controls

 

Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the hatch unlock button to unlock the hatch.

 

Hatch

Unlock

Button

1Using the Remote Transmitter

 

If you have unlocked and opened the hatch using the remote transmitter, when closing, the hatch locks automatically.

162

Security System

Immobilizer System

 

The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key.

Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch* or pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button*:

Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch* or the ENGINE START/STOP button*.
Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ignition switch* or the ENGINE START/STOP button*.
Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic devices, such as televisions and audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can become magnetic.
1Immobilizer System

 

NOTICE

Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.

Always take the key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the vehicle on the first time after the battery has been disconnected.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models 163

Security SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls

 

Security System Alarm

 

The security system alarm activates when the hatch, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not activate if the hatch or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system*.

However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the transmission is taken out of P (continuously variable transmission models) or the hood is opened before the ignition switch is turned to ON w*1.

When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and some exterior lights flash.

To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system*, or turn the ignition switch to ON w*1. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.

1Security System Alarm

 

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.

The security system alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models
Security SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met:

The ignition switch is in LOCK 0*1, and the key has been removed from the ignition switch.
The hood is closed.
All doors and the hatch are locked from outside with the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system*.
When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds.

To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote transmitter or smart entry system*, or when the ignition switch is turned to ON w*1. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

1Security System Alarm

 

Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when:

Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
Opening the hood with the hood release.
Continuously variable transmission models

Taking the transmission out of (P.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may go off once the battery is recharged or replaced.

If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system*.

Controls

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models Continued 165

Security SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls

 

Panic Mode

Panic Button

The panic button on the remote
transmitter

If you press the panic button for

approximately one second, the following will

occur for about 30 seconds:

The horn sounds.
Some exterior lights flash.
Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter.
Turn the ignition switch to ON w*1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

166

Opening and Closing the Windows

Opening/Closing the Power Windows

 

The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON w*1, using the switches on the doors.

The driver’s side switches can be used to open and close all the windows. The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver’s seat.

When the power window lock button is pressed, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in the vehicle.

Opening/Closing the Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

 

WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.

The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1.

Opening either front door cancels this function.

Controls

 

Power Window

Lock Button

Indicator

Driver’s

Front Passenger’s

Window

Switch

Window Switch

 

Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.

To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.

Auto Reverse

If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it will stop closing and reverse direction.

The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued 167

Opening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

 

While driving with any of the windows open, you may hear a booming, throbbing, or helicopter-type

Controls

 

Close

 

Open

To open: Push the switch down.

To close: Pull the switch up.

Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position.

noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is a normal occurrence that can be minimized.

If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the windows open, lower all of the other windows slightly or open the moonroof*.

Opening the Windows with the Remote
To open: Press the unlock button, and then within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it.

 

If the windows stop midway, repeat the procedure.

Unlock

Button

1Opening the Windows with the Remote

If you open the windows with the remote, the moonroof* will open automatically along with them.

* Not available on all models
Opening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the

key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to

the central position, turn the key in the unlock

Close

direction and hold it there.

To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.

Open

Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the

central position, turn the key in the lock

direction and hold it there.

Release the key to stop the windows at the

desired position. If you want further

adjustment, repeat the same operation.

 

1Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key

 

If you open/close the windows with the key, the moonroof* will open/close automatically along with them.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models 169

Moonroof*

Opening/Closing the Moonroof

 

You can operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

Using the Moonroof Switch
1Moonroof*

 

WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on

Controls

 

Open

 

Close Tilt

Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

The moonroof automatically opens or closes all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, pull or push the switch briefly.

Manual operation
someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.

NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and

hold it until the desired position is reached.

To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and

hold it until the desired position is reached.

Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof

switch.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly,

then release.

The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Opening either front door cancels this function.

When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof.

You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof.

Opening the Windows with the Remote
P. 168

Opening/Closing the Windows with the Key P. 169
* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

Ignition Switch*

 

(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this position.

(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.

(w ON: This is the position when driving.

(e START: This position is for starting the engine. The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of the key.

1Ignition Switch*

 

Manual transmission models

WARNING
Removing the key from the ignition switch while driving locks the steering. This can cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Remove the key from the ignition switch only when parked.

Continuously variable transmission models

You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is in (P.

All models

If you open the driver’s door when the key is in LOCK (0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound to remind you to take the key out.

When the warning buzzer sounds, the following messages appear on the driver information interface:

In LOCK (0: Remove Key From Ignition.
In ACCESSORY (q: Return Ignition Switch To
Lock (0) Position.

If the key won’t turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY (q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the key to turn.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models 171

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button*
Controls

 

ENGINE START/STOP Button*

 

Changing the Power Mode

Continuously Variable Transmission Manual Transmission

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)

The button is off.

The steering wheel is locked*1.

The power to all electrical

components is turned off.

*2

ACCESSORY

The button blinks (in red).

Operate the audio system and

other accessories in this position.

ON

The button blinks (in red).

All electrical components can be

used.

1ENGINE START/STOP Button*

 

ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range

Operating Range

You can start the engine when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.

The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.

ON mode:

The ENGINE START/STOP button is on (in red), if the engine is running.

Without pressing

the brake pedal

Press the button without the shift lever in (P.

Press the button with the shift lever in (P.

Without pressing

the clutch pedal

Press the button.

Shift to (P*2.

If the battery of the smart entry remote is getting low, the engine may not start when you press the ENGINE START/STOP button. If the engine does not start, refer to the following link.

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 660
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON

172

*1:U.S. models with manual transmission and Canadian models

*2:U.S. models with continuously variable transmission * Not available on all models

when you get out.

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button*
Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in P*1 and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.

U.S. models with manual transmission and Canadian models

 

When in this mode:

The steering wheel does not lock.

You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry system.

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

*1: Continuously variable transmission models

Controls

 

Continued 173

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button*
Controls

 

Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning beep sounds.

Smart Entry Remote Reminder
Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/ or outside the vehicle to remind you that the smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the buzzer continues even after the remote is put back inside, place it to be within its operational range.

 

When the power mode is in ON
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the

vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a

warning buzzer sounds from both inside and

outside the vehicle. A warning message on

the driver information interface notifies the

driver inside that the remote is outside of the

vehicle.

When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY

If the smart entry remote is taken out of the

vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a

warning buzzer sounds from outside the

vehicle.

1Smart Entry Remote Reminder

 

When the smart entry remote is within the system’s operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the warning function cancels.

If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.

Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to go off. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is within the system’s operational range.

174

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

 

Ignition Switch

LOCK (0

ACCESSORY (q

ON (w

START (e

Position

(with/without

the key)

Without Smart Entry

Engine is turned off and

Engine is turned off.

Normal key position

Use this position to start

System

power is shut down.

Some electrical

while driving.

the engine.

The steering wheel is

components such as the

All electrical components

The ignition switch

locked.

audio system and the

can be used.

returns to the ON (w

No electrical

accessory power socket

position when you

Controls

components can be

can be operated.

release the key.

used.

 

Power Mode VEHICLE OFF ACCESSORY ON START

(LOCK)

Button is: Blinking On

With Smart Entry

Button-Off

Button-Blinking

Button-

Button-On

System and ENGINE

Engine is turned off and

Engine is turned off.

Blinking (engine is turned

● The mode automatically

START/STOP

power is shut down.

Some electrical

off)

returns to ON after the

Button

The steering wheel is

components such as the

On (engine is running)

engine starts.

locked*1.

audio system and the

● All electrical components

No electrical

accessory power socket

can be used.

components can be

can be operated.

used.

*1:U.S. models with manual transmission and Canadian models

175

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Turn Signals

 

Right Turn

 

Left Turn

 

Controls

The turn signals can be used when the ignition

switch is in ON w*1.

One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release

the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals

and turn signal indicator blink three times.

This feature can be used when signaling for a

lane change.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

176

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Light Switches

Manual Operation

High Beams

Flashing the high beams Low Beams

Turns on parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

Turns on headlights, parking, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the power mode setting or position of the ignition switch.

 

High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.

Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams.

Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.
Canadian models

Lights off
Turn the lever to OFF either when:

The transmission is in P. (Continuously Variable Transmission models)
The parking brake is applied.
To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even if you do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights come on automatically when:

The transmission is taken out of P (Continuously Variable Transmission models) and the parking brake is released.
The vehicle starts to move.
1Light Switches

 

Models with smart entry system

If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened.

Models without smart entry system

If you remove the key from the ignition switch while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened.

All models

When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on.

Lights On Indicator P. 92
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge.

If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Controls

 

Continued 177

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Controls

 

Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
Automatic lighting control can be used when

 

the ignition switch is in ON w*1.

When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness.

The headlights come on when you unlock a

door in dark areas with the headlight switch in

AUTO.

u Once you lock the door, the headlights

will go off.

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

 

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly.

Models without automatic

intermittent wiper

Light Sensor

Models with automatic intermittent wiper

Light Sensor

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

178

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Headlight Integration with Wipers
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.

The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you remove the key or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with you, and close the driver’s door.

If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK 0*1 with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

 

U.S. models

You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:

Setting

The exterior lights come on

when the ambient light is at

Max

Bright

High

Mid

Low

Dark

Min

Customized Features P. 134, 350
1Headlight Integration with Wipers

This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO.

The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.

At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.

1Automatic Lighting Off Feature

You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
Controls

 

179

 

Controls

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights*
Fog Lights*

 

When the low beam headlights are on, turn

 

the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

Fog Light Switch

Daytime Running Lights

 

The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met:

The ignition switch is in ON w*1.
The headlight switch is in AUTO or OFF.
The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.

The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the headlight switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Auto High-Beam

 

The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high beam depending on the situation.

 

Front Sensor Camera

How to Use the Auto High-Beam
When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator comes on and the auto high-beam is activated.

1Auto High-Beam

 

The auto high-beam system does not always operate in every situation. This system is just for assisting the driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch the headlights between high beam and low beam manually if necessary.

If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually.

The range and the distance at which the camera can recognize varies depending on conditions surrounding your vehicle.

Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.

Front Sensor Camera P. 546
Controls

 

Light Switch

 

Auto High-Beam

Indicator

The ignition switch is in ON w*1.
The light switch is in AUTO.
The lever is in the low beam position.
The headlights have been automatically activated.
It is dark outside the vehicle.
For the auto high-beam to work properly:

Do not place an object that reflects light on the dashboard.
Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area around the camera.
Do not touch the camera lens.
If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on.

Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.

Continued 181

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam
When auto-high beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low beam based on the following conditions.

Switching to high beam: Switching to low beam:

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

 

In the following cases, the auto high-beam system may not switch the headlights properly or the switching timing may be changed. In case of the automatic switching operation does not fit for your driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.

Controls

 

All of the following conditions must be met before the high beams turn on.

Your vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
There are no preceding or oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on.
There are few street lights on the road ahead.
One of the following conditions must be met before the low beams turn on.

Your vehicle speed is 15 mph (24 km/h) or less.
There is a preceding or oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on.
There are many street lights on the road ahead.

• The brightness of the lights from the preceding or

oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.

• Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,

fog, windshield frost, etc.).

• Surrounding light sources, such as street lights,

electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating

the road ahead.

• The brightness level of the road ahead constantly

changes.

• The road is bumpy or has many curves.

Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam
If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam, follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto high-beam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.

Using the lever:

Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about one second while driving.

u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will come on.

Using the light switch:

Turn the light switch to .

u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on.

• A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a

vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or

oncoming direction.

• Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear.

• A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object

ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle.

• The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under

roadside trees or behind median barriers.

• The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,

bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.

The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low beam when:

Windshield wipers are operating at a high speed.
The camera has detected a dense fog.
182

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam
How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam
You can turn the auto high-beam system off. If you want to turn the system off or on, turn the ignition switch to ON w*1, then carry out the following procedures while the vehicle is stationary.

To turn the system off:

AUTO Position

With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever

toward you and hold it for at least 40 seconds.

After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks

twice, release the lever.

 

To turn the system on:

With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 30 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks once, release the lever.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam

 

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears:

Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed toward the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears:

Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
1How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam

If you turn the auto high-beam system off, the system does not operate until you turn the system on.

Park in a safe place before turning the system off or on.

Controls

 

183

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Wipers and Washers

Windshield Wipers/Washers

1Wipers and Washers

 

Controls

 

Pull to

 

use

washer.

Intermittent Time

Adjustment Ring*

MIST

OFF

INT*2/AUTO*3

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the ignition switch is in ON w*1.

MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.

Wiper switch (OFF, INT*2/AUTO*3, LO, HI)
Move the lever up or down to change the wiper settings.

Adjusting wiper operation*
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper operation.

 

Lower speed, fewer sweeps

Higher speed, more sweeps

Washer
NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.

NOTICE

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.

The pump may get damaged.

The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.

Models with intermittent time adjustment ring

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens.

When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.

Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.

When you release the lever for more than one

second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two

or three more times to clear the windshield,

then stop.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*2: Models with manual intermittent operation

*3: Models with automatic intermittent operation

NOTICE

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield.

Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.

* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Automatic Intermittent Wipers*
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the automatic mode.

 

The wipers operate intermittently, at low

speed, or at high speed and stops in

accordance with the amount of rainfall the

Adjustment

Ring

rainfall sensor detects.

AUTO sensitivity adjustment
When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor (using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will operate in accordance with your preference.

Sensor sensitivity

 

Low sensitivity

High sensitivity

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Wipers and Washers

 

If the wipers stop operating due to an obstacle such as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.

Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0*1, then remove the obstacle.

1Automatic Intermittent Wipers*

The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.

Rainfall

Sensor

NOTICE

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system:

Cleaning the windshield
Driving through a car wash
No rain present
Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 185

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Rear Wiper/Washer*
Controls

 

INT: Intermittent

 

ON: Continuous wipe

OFF

Washer

Operating in reverse
The rear wiper and washer can be used when

the ignition switch is in ON w*1.

Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)
Change the wiper switch setting according to

the amount of rain.

Washer ( )
Sprays on the rear window while you rotate

the switch to this position.

Hold it to activate the rear wiper and to spray

the washer. Once released, the washer spray

will stop and the rear wiper will return to its

selected switch setting after a few sweeps.

When you put the transmission into R with the windshield wipers activated, the rear wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rear Wiper Operation

Intermittent

Intermittent

Low speed wipe

Continuous

High speed wipe

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Brightness Control

 

When the brightness of the meter will be reduced, you can use the brightness control knob to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Turn the knob to the right. Dim: Turn the knob to the left.

 

You will hear a beep when the brightness

Control Knob

reaches minimum or maximum. Several

seconds after adjusting the brightness, you

will be returned to the previous display.

Brightness level indicator

The brightness level is shown on the display while you are adjusting it.

1Brightness Control

 

The brightness of the instrument panel will be reduced when the following conditions:

The ignition switch is in ON (w*1.
The light switch is in any position other than OFF and it is dark outside.
To cancels the reduced instrument panel brightness when the exterior lights are on, turn the knob to the right until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds.

The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off.

Controls

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

187

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON w*1.

Models with color audio system

The rear defogger and heated door mirrors automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes

depending on the outside temperature.

However, if the outside temperature is 32°F

(0°C) or below, it does not automatically switch off.

Models with Display Audio

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

 

Controls

 

188

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

 

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged.

Also, do not use the system for a long time while the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

When the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1 and the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the heated door mirror may automatically activate for 10 minutes.

To lock

To adjust

Operating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel

 

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.

1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is

 

under the steering column.

2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and

in or out.

u Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators.

3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever

Lever

down to lock the steering wheel in position. u After adjusting the position, make sure you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up,

down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

 

WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

Controls

 

189

Adjusting the Mirrors

Controls

 

Interior Rearview Mirror

 

Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.

Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*
Flip the tab to switch the position.

 

The night position will help to reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving after dark.

Daytime

Position

Night Position

1Adjusting the Mirrors

 

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.

Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.

Front Seats P. 193
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*

2.0 L engine models

 

When you are driving after dark, the

Up

automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces

the glare from headlights behind you, based

Down

on inputs from the mirror sensor. This feature

is always active.

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*

The auto dimming function cancels when the transmission is in (R.

Sensor

* Not available on all models
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuInterior Rearview Mirror

1.5 L engine models

 

When you are driving after dark, the

automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces

Sensor

the glare from headlights behind you, based

on inputs from the mirror sensor. Press the

auto button to turn this function on and off.

When activated, the auto indicator comes on.

 

Auto Button

Controls

191

Adjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Power Door Mirrors

 

Controls

 

Selector

 

Adjustment Switch

Switch

You can adjust the door mirrors when the

ignition switch is in ON w*1.

Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right

mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the

switch to the center position.

Mirror position adjustment switch: Press

the switch left, right, up, or down to move the

mirror.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

192

Adjusting the Seats

Front Seats

 

Allow sufficient space.

 

Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible

while allowing you to maintain full control of

the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,

well back in the seat and be able to

adequately press the pedals without leaning

forward, and grip the steering wheel

comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be

Move back.

adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far

back from the front airbag in the dashboard

as possible.

1Adjusting the Seats

 

WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.

Controls

 

Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjusting the front power seat(s)*

Horizontal Position Adjustment

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

Height Adjustment

(Driver’s seat only)

Seat-back Angle

Adjustment

* Not available on all models Continued 193

Adjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*
1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)*

 

Controls

 

Height Adjustment

 

(Driver side only)

Pull up or push down the lever

to raise or lower the seat.

Horizontal Position

Adjustment Driver’s seat is shown.

Pull up on the bar to move the

seat, then release the bar.

Seat-back Angle

Adjustment

Pull up the lever to

change the angle.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.

* Not available on all models
Adjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.

 

The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

 

WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.

Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back.

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

Controls

 

195

Adjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Controls

 

Head Restraints

 

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.

1.5 L engine models

 

Adjusting the Front Head Restraints Positions
Front head restraints are most effective for

 

protection against whiplash and other rear-

impact crash injuries when the center of the

back of the occupant’s head rests against the

center of the restraint. The tops of the

occupant’s ears should be level with the

center height of the restraint.

Position head in the center

of the head restraint.

To raise the head restraint:

 

Pull it upward.

To lower the head restraint:

Push it down while pressing the release button.

1Adjusting the Front Head Restraints Positions

 

WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.

In order for the head restraint system to work properly:

Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs.
Do not place any objects between an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper location.
196

Adjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
1.5 L engine models

 

Removing and Reinstalling the Front Head Restraints
Front head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.

To remove a head restraint:

Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out.

To reinstall a head restraint:

Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.

1Removing and Reinstalling the Front Head Restraints

 

WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before driving.

Controls

 

197

Adjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position
Controls

 

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

 

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints*, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

 

WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

* Not available on all models
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Rear Seats

Folding Down the Rear Seats

The rear seats can be folded down separately to allow for additional storage space.

1Folding Down the Rear Seats

 

The rear seat-back(s) can be folded down to accommodate bulkier items in the cargo area.

Release Lever

 

Red Tab

Pull the release lever and fold down the seat-back.

To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks, so that the red tabs in the release lever go down.

When returning the seat-back to its original position, push it firmly back.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly.

Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 61
Make sure all items in the cargo area or items extending to the rear seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.

The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold down.

Controls

 

199

 

Controls

Adjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Armrest

Using the Front Seat Armrest

The console lid can be used as an armrest.

 

To adjust:

Slide the armrest to desired position.

Using the Rear Seat Armrest*
Pull down the armrest in the center backrest.

 

* Not available on all models
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights

Interior Light Switches

Models with moonroof

Front

Off

Door Activated Position

All models

Rear

Door Activated Position

On

Off

ON

The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.

Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following situations:

When any of the doors are opened.
You unlock the driver’s door.
Models without smart entry system

 

You remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).

OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.

1Interior Light Switches

 

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.

The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the following situations:

When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it.
Models without smart entry system

When you remove the key from the ignition switch but do not open a door.
Models with smart entry system

When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations:

When you lock the driver’s door.
Models without smart entry system

When you close the driver’s door with the key in the ignition switch.
When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w.
Models with smart entry system

When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY mode.
When you set the power mode to ON.
To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the interior light on for an extended length of time when the engine is off.

Controls

 

Continued 201

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
Controls

 

Map Lights
The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses.

 

1Interior Light Switches

 

If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, or without the key in the ignition switch, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.

1Map Lights

Models with moonroof

When the front interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens.

202

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Interior Convenience Items

Glove Box

1Glove Box

Pull the handle to open the glove box.

3WARNING

An open glove box can cause serious injury

to your passenger in a crash, even if the

passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while

driving.

 

Controls

Continued 203

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Console Compartment
Your vehicle has a multi-function center

 

console. It includes a storage compartment,

an armrest, and a sliding tray*.

Slide the armrest to the rearmost position. Pull

the handle to open the console compartment.

You can put small items in the sliding tray*

 

located in the console compartment lid. Slide

the sliding tray forward or rearward.

Sliding Tray*

Removable

Beverage

Holder Tray

Divider

 

You can create more storage space by

removing the removable beverage holder tray

and a divider.

* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Beverage Holders
Front seat beverage holders

Are located in the console between the front seats.

u Move the armrest rearward to use the beverage holders.

To place a short beverage container:

 

Move the removable beverage holder tray forward.

To place a tall beverage container: Move the removable beverage holder tray rearward.

1Beverage Holders

 

NOTICE

Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.

Hot liquid can scald you.

Controls

 

Continued 205

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Rear seat beverage holders*

1.5 L engine models

Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat

beverage holders.

2.0 L engine models

 

Are located on the rear seat.

* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Door beverage holders

Front seat

 

Rear seat

Controls

 

Continued 207

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

Accessory Power Socket
The accessory power socket can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY q or ON w*1.

Open the cover to use it.

 

1Accessory Power Socket

 

NOTICE

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket.

The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less.

To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket with the engine running.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

208

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Canadian models

 

Wireless Charger*
To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the mark as follows:

(Power) Button

1. To turn the system on and off, press and

hold the

(power) button.

Green Indicator

u When the system is activated, the green

Amber Indicator

indicator light comes on.

2. Place the device you want to charge on the

charging area.

u The system will automatically start

charging the device, and the amber

indicator light will come on.

u Make sure that the device is compatible

with the system, and placed with the

Charging Area

chargeable side in the center of the

charging area.

 

When charging is completed, the green indicator light will come on.
u Depending on the device, the amber indicator light will stay on.

1Wireless Charger*

 

CAUTION
Metal objects between the charge pad and the device to be charged will get hot and can burn you.

Always remove foreign objects from the charge pad before charging the device.
Be sure the surface is clear of dust and other debris before charging.
Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks, etc.) on the charger and the device.
Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine or thinner for cleaning the charge pad.
Do not cover the system with towels, clothing, or other objects while charging etc.
Avoid spraying aerosols which may come in contact with the charge pad surface.
This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the system for a long time when the engine is not running. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.

When using the wireless charger, check the user’s manual that came with the compatible device you want to charge.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 209

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls

 

When charging does not start
Perform one of the solutions in the following table.

Indicator

Cause

Solution

There is an obstacle(s) between

Remove the

the charging area and the

obstacle(s).

Green

Blinking

device.

&

simulta

Move the device to the

Amber

neously

The device is not within the

center of the charging

charging area.

area where

is

located.

Amber

Blinking

The wireless charger is faulty.

Contact a dealer for

repairs.

 

1Wireless Charger*

 

NOTICE

Do not place any magnetic recording media or precision machines within the charging area while charging. The data on your cards such as credit cards can be lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision machines such as watches can go wrong.

“Qi” and marks are the registered trademarks owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).

In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:

The device is already fully charged.
The temperature of the device is extremely high while charging.
You are at a place that emits strong electromagnetic waves or noises, such as TV station, electric power plant, or gas station.
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the charging area.

Not all devices are compatible with the system.

During the charging phase, it is normal for the charging area and device to heat up.

Charging may be briefly interrupted when:

All the doors and the hatch are closed
– to avoid interference with the proper functioning of the smart entry system.

The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a charging area.

* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Coat Hooks
1Coat Hooks

 

There are coat hooks on the left and right

The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy

items.

door pillars.

 

Controls

Continued 211

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Cargo Hook
Controls

Hook

 

■ Tie-down Anchors

 

Anchor

Anchor

The cargo hook in the cargo area can be used to hang a light items.

The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor can be used to install a net for securing items.

1Cargo Hook

 

NOTICE

Do not hang a large object or an object that weighs more than 6 lbs (3 kg) on the cargo hook.

Hanging heavy or large objects may damage the hook.

1Tie-down Anchors

Do not let anyone access items in the cargo area while driving. Loose items can cause injury if you have to brake hard.

212

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Cargo Area Cover*

Handle

 

The cargo area cover can be used to conceal your parcels and protect them from direct sunlight.

To extend:
Pull the handle fully toward the hook on the other side and let the hook catch hold of the handle.

To retract:
Slip the rods out of the hooks, then slowly roll it back until it is completely retracted.

1Cargo Area Cover*

 

Do not access parcels in the cargo area while driving.

This may cause injury if you have to brake hard.

Do not stack objects higher than the top of the seat in the cargo area. They could block your view and be thrown about the vehicle during a sudden stop.

To prevent cargo area cover damage:

Do not place items on the cargo area cover.
Do not put weight on the cargo area cover.
Controls

 

Hooks

Extension

Clips

Tab

Clips

 

Cargo area cover extension
The extension is attached at the back of the

hatch by four clips. It extends the covering

area when you close the hatch. To remove,

unclip the extension from the hatch. When

reinstalling the extension, make sure that the

tabs come to the near side.

* Not available on all models Continued 213

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Mark

 

Lever

 

To remove:
Push and hold the lever in the direction of the

arrow mark on the housing and lift the

housing out of its position.

Controls

The housing can be installed on either side of

 

the cargo area.

214

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Front Seat Heaters*
The ignition switch must be in ON w*1 to use the seat heaters.

 

Press the seat heater button:

 

Once – The HI setting (three indicators on)

Twice – The MID setting (two indicators on)

Three times – The LO setting (one indicator on)

Four times – The OFF setting (no indicators on)

1Front Seat Heaters*

 

WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

Controls

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models Continued 215

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Rear Seat Heaters*

1Rear Seat Heaters*

 

Controls

 

The power mode must be in ON to use the seat heaters.

 

There is no heater in the rear center seating position.

While in HI, the heater cycles on and off. u The appropriate indicator will be on

while the seat heater is on. Briefly press the switch on the opposite side to turn the heater off. The indicator will be off.

WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and

does not automatically turn off.

* Not available on all models
Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control

 

The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.

 

Models with color audio system

AUTO Button

(ON/OFF) Button

Temperature

Fan Control

Control Dial

Dial

A/C (Air

Conditioning)

(Recirculation) Button

Button

Dashboard

Dashboard

Floor vents

Floor and

vents

and floor

defroster

vents

vents

Use the system when the engine is running.

Press the AUTO button.
Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.
Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.
1Using Automatic Climate Control

 

If any buttons/icons* are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button/icon* that was pressed will take priority.

The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the button/icon* that was pressed will be controlled automatically.

To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO button is pressed.

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh air mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models Continued 217

Climate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Models with Display Audio

 

Models without SYNC button

1Using Automatic Climate Control

 

Pressing the button switches the climate control

system between on and off. When turned on, the

Controls

 

A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon

MODE Control

Icon

(Dashboard vents)

MODE Control Icon

(Floor vents)

Fan Control Icon

MODE Control Icon (Floor and defroster vents)

MODE Control Icon

(Dashboard and

floor vents)

(CLIMATE)

Button

system returns to your last selection.

Models with ECON button

While ECON mode is active, the climate control system may have reduced cooling performance.

Models with Display Audio

Press the CLIMATE button to display A/C, MODE, fan control information on the audio/information screen to operate manually. Select icon to turn on or off A/C, change the vent mode, or change the fan speed.

Temperature Control Dial

AUTO Button

(Recirculation) Button

Fan Control

Dial

(ON/OFF) Button

(Fresh Air) Button

Use the system when the engine is running.

Press the AUTO button.
Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.
Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.
218

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

 

Models with Display Audio

Models with SYNC button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon

MODE Control Icon

(Floor and

MODE Control

defroster vents)

Icon

(Dashboard vents)

MODE Control

MODE Control Icon

Icon

(Dashboard and

Controls

(Floor vents)

floor vents)

Fan Control Icon

/

(Fan Control)

CLIMATE

Buttons

Button

Driver’s Side

Passenger’s

Temperature

Side

Control Dial

Temperature

Control Dial

AUTO Button

SYNC (Synchronization) Button

(ON/OFF) Button

(Recirculation) Button

 

Use the system when the engine is running.

Press the AUTO button.
Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side temperature control dial.
Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.
Continued 219

Climate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls

 

Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Models without fresh air button

Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions.

Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system.

Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.

Models with fresh air button

Press the (recirculation) or (fresh air) button to switch the mode depending on environmental conditions.

Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system.

Fresh air mode (indicator on): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations.

220

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the (windshield defroster) button turns the air conditioning system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode.

 

Press the button again to turn off, the

system returns to the previous settings.

 

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

 

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit.

When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows.

Controls

 

Continued 221

Climate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls

 

To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the button.

 

2. Press the button.

 

1To rapidly defrost the windows

 

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.

222

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

Synchronization Mode*

Driver’s Side

Passenger’s

Temperature

Side

Control Dial

Temperature

Control Dial

SYNC Button

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver’s side and the passenger’s side in synchronization mode.

Press the SYNC button.
u The system switches to synchronization mode.

Adjust the temperature using the driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button or change the passenger’s side temperature setting to return to dual mode.

1Synchronization Mode*

 

When you press the button, the system changes to synchronization mode.

When the system is in dual mode, the driver’s side temperature and the passenger’s side temperature can be set separately.

Controls

 

* Not available on all models 223

Climate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Automatic Climate Control Sensors

 

Sensor

 

The automatic climate control system is

equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill

any liquid on them.

Controls

Sensor

 

224

Features

This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System

Playing Bluetooth® Audio……………..

248

About Your Audio System

226

Models with Display Audio

USB Port(s) …………………………………

227

Audio System Basic Operation ……..

251

Audio System Theft Protection ………

229

Audio/Information Screen …………….

252

Audio Remote Controls………………..

230

Adjusting the Sound ……………………

273

Display Setup

274

Models with color audio system

Audio System Basic Operation ……..

233

Voice Control Operation ………………

276

Audio/Information Screen …………….

234

Playing AM/FM Radio…………………..

280

Adjusting the Sound ……………………

238

Playing SiriusXM® Radio* ……………..

283

Display Setup ……………………………..

239

Playing an iPod …………………………..

291

Playing the AM/FM Radio ……………..

240

Song By VoiceTM (SBV)………………….

294

Playing an iPod …………………………..

242

Playing Pandora®*1 ………………………

298

Playing a USB Flash Drive ……………..

245

Playing a USB Flash Drive ……………..

300

Playing Bluetooth® Audio 303

HondaLink® 305

Wi-Fi Connection 310

Siri Eyes Free 312

Apple CarPlay 313

Android Auto 316

Audio Error Messages 320

General Information on the Audio System..324

Customized Features 343, 350

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*.. 380

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® 383, 410

*1: Available only on U.S. models.

* Not available on all models 225

Audio System

Features

 

About Your Audio System

 

The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service*. It can also play USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface*.

 

iPod

1About Your Audio System

 

SiriusXM® Radio* is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio*, contact a dealer.

General Information on the Audio System P. 324
SiriusXM® Radio* is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

SiriusXM®* is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.

iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

Remote Controls

USB Flash Drive

* Not available on all models
Audio SystemuUSB Port(s)
USB Port(s)

 

USB Extension Cable*2

 

Models with

Models with

color audio

Display

system

Audio

Models with color audio system

 

u The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files on a USB flash drive and connecting a cellular phone and charging device.

Models with Display Audio

 

u The USB port (1.5A) is for charging devices, playing audio files and connecting compatible phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

u To prevent any potential issues, be sure to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning Connector for Apple CarPlay, and for Android Auto, the USB cables should be certified by USB-IF to be compliant with USB 2.0 Standard.

U.S. models

 

Your vehicle comes supplied with a USB extension cable that runs from the USB port up through to the front console.

1USB Port(s)

 

Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.
You may also use your own USB cable.
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version.
USB charge

The USB port can supply up to 1.5A of power. It does not output 1.5A unless requested by the device. For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged.

Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise in the radio you are listening to.

Features

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*2: Pre-installed on U.S. models only.

Continued 227

Audio SystemuUSB Port(s)
■ In the console compartment*

In the console compartment

The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files

on the USB flash drive and connecting a

cellular phone and charging device.

u Move the removable beverage holder

tray rearward.

 

Features

* Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Audio System Theft Protection

 

The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.

Reactivating the audio system
Turn the ignition switch to ON w*1.
Turn on the audio system.
Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize

the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.

 

Features

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

229

Audio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Audio Remote Controls

 

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on the driver information interface.

1Audio Remote Controls

 

Some modes appear only when an appropriate

(+ (- Bar

 

ENTER Button

3 Button

Button

Button

4 Button

Button

 

Models with Display Audio

 

ENTER Button

3 4 Buttons

Press 3 or 4 to cycle through the audio mode as follows:

FM AM SiriusXM®* USB iPod Bluetooth® Audio Pandora®* Apple CarPlay/Android Auto* Audio Apps*

device or medium is used.

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some functions may not be available.

Press the (Hang-up/back) button to go back to the previous command or cancel a command.

Press the button to switch display.

Switching the Display P. 252
Features

When listening to the radio and SiriusXM®*
Press ENTER to switch the display to a preset list you stored in the preset buttons.
Press 3 or 4 to select a preset, then press ENTER.
When listening to a USB flash drive
Press ENTER to display the folder list.
Press 3 or 4 to select a folder.
Press ENTER to display a list of files in that folder.
Press 3 or 4 to select a file, then press ENTER.
* Not available on all models
When listening to an iPod
Press ENTER to display the iPod music list.
Press 3 or 4 to select a category.
Press ENTER to display a list of items in the category.
Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then press ENTER.
u Press ENTER and press 3 or 4 repeatedly until the desired mode you want to listen to is displayed.

When listening to Pandora®*
Press ENTER to display the station list.
Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then press ENTER.
When listening to Bluetooth® Audio
Press ENTER to display the track list.
Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then press ENTER.
Audio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Features

* Not available on all models Continued 231

Audio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features

 

– (Volume) Bar
Press +: To increase the volume.

Press -: To decrease the volume.

Buttons

When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.

Press : To select the previous preset radio station.

Press and hold : To select the next strong station.

Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.

When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

When listening to a USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.

Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.

When listening to Pandora®* Press : To skip to the next track.
Press and hold : To select the next station.

Press and hold : To select the previous station.

* Not available on all models
Audio System Basic Operation

Models with color audio system

 

To use the audio system, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY q or ON w.

Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK

(Day/Night)

(Sound)

button to access some audio functions.

Button

Button

Press

to switch between the normal and

extended display for some functions.

Selector Knob: Rotate left or right to scroll

through the available choices. Press to set

(Back)

MENU/

your selection.

CLOCK

MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any

Button

Button

mode.

Selector Knob

The available modes include wallpaper,

Menu Display

display, clock, language setup, and play

modes. Play mode choices include scan,

random, repeat, and so on.

(Back) button: Press to go back to the

previous display.

button: Press to select the sound

setting mode.

(Day/Night) button: Press to change

the audio/information screen brightness.

Press

, then adjust the brightness using

.

u Each time you press

, the mode

switches between the daytime mode,

nighttime mode and OFF mode.

 

1Audio System Basic Operation

 

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Menu Items

Adjust Clock P. 144
Wallpaper Setup P. 236
Adjusting the Sound P. 238
Display Setup P. 239
Customized Features P. 343
Press the button on the steering wheel to change any audio setting.

Audio Remote Controls P. 230
Features

 

233

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Audio/Information Screen

 

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options.

Switching the Display

Features

 

Audio/Information Screen

Audio

Clock/Wallpaper

234

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio
Shows the current audio information.

Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

Change display
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Display Change, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .

u If you want to return to the audio display, select Audio.

Features

Continued 235

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.

Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 227

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press
.

Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press
.

 

5. Rotate to select Import, then press .

 

u The picture name is displayed on the list.

Rotate to select a desired picture, then press .
u The selected picture is displayed.

Press to save the picture.
Press to select OK.
Rotate to select a location to save the

picture, then press .

 

u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.

1Wallpaper Setup

 

When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, a message appears.
236

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Select wallpaper
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
Rotate to select Select, then press .

u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.

Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press .

Delete wallpaper
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
Rotate to select Delete, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .
Rotate to select Yes, then press .

u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.

1Wallpaper Setup

 

To go back to the previous screen, press the (Back) button.

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.

Features

 

237

Audio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Sound

 

(Sound) Button

 

Selector Knob

 

TRE is selectable.

 

Press the (Sound) button, and rotate to scroll through the following choices:

BAS

Bass

 

1Adjusting the Sound

 

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

Features

MID

Middle

TRE

Treble

FAD

Fader

BAL

Balance

SVC

Speed-sensitive

Volume

Compensation

Rotate to adjust the sound setting, then

press .

 

238

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup

 

You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

Changing the Screen Brightness
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press
.

Rotate to select Display Adjustment, then press .
Rotate to select Brightness, then press
.

Rotate to adjust the setting, then press
.

Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press
.

Rotate to select Color Theme, then press .
Rotate to select the setting you want, then press .

1Changing the Screen Brightness

 

You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

Features

 

239

 

Features

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
Playing the AM/FM Radio

 

RADIO Button

Audio/Information Screen

Press to select a band.

VOL/ (Volume/power) Knob

Selector Knob

Press to turn the audio system

Turn to tune the radio frequency.

on and off.

Press, and then turn to select an

Turn to adjust the volume.

item. After that, press again to

make your selection.

/

(Seek/Skip) Buttons

MENU/CLOCK Button

Press

or

to search up and down

Press to display the menu items.

the

selected

band for a station with a strong

signal.

(Back) Button

Preset Buttons (1-6)

Press to go back to the previous

display or cancel a setting.

To store a station:

Tune to the selected station.
Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.

240

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio
Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select the station, then press .

Update List

Updates your available station list at any time.

Press while listening to an FM station.
Rotate to select Update List, then press .

Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select RDS Settings, then press .
Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .

Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Scan, then press .

To turn off scan, press .

 

1Playing the AM/FM Radio

 

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the audio source selecting button on the steering wheel.

Audio Remote Controls P. 230
1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

Features

 

241

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Playing an iPod

 

Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.

USB Port(s) P. 227

Features

 

USB Indicator

Appears when an iPod is connected.

Album Art

MEDIA Button

Press to select iPod

(if connected).

VOL/ (Volume/power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press or to change songs.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Play Button

Pause Button

Press to resume a

Play Mode Buttons

song.

Press to pause a

song.

Press to select a play mode.

Audio/Information Screen

Selector Knob

Turn to change songs.

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

MENU/CLOCK Button

Press to display the menu items.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous

display or cancel a setting.

242

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the Selector Knob
Press to display the iPod music list.

Category

2. Rotate

to select a category.

Selection

 

Item

 

Selection 3. Press to display a list of items in the category.

Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is displayed.

 

1Playing an iPod

 

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 320
Features

 

Continued 243

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features

 

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.

Available mode icons appear above the play

 

mode buttons.

Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons

To turn off a play mode Press the selected button.
1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.

Shuffle: Plays all available songs in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.

Repeat One Track: Repeats the current song.

You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button.

Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .

Rotate to select a mode, then press .

To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

244

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA or AAC*1 format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.

USB Port(s) P. 227

USB Indicator

Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.

MEDIA Button

Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).

VOL/ (Volume/power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press or to change files.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.

Play Mode Buttons (1-6)

Press to select a play mode.

Audio/Information Screen

 

Features

Selector Knob

Turn to change files.

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

MENU/CLOCK Button

Press to display the menu items.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

Continued 245

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features

 

How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
Press to display a folder list.

Folder

2. Rotate

to select a folder.

Selection

 

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

General Information on the Audio System P. 324
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 320
File

Selection 3. Press to display a list of files in that folder.

4. Rotate to select a file, then press .

 

246

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.

Available mode icons appear above the play

 

mode buttons.

Press the button corresponding to the mode

you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons

To turn off a play mode Press the selected button.
1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Repeat

Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.

Random

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.

Random All: Plays all files in random order.

Scan

Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.

You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button.

Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .

Rotate to select a mode, then press .

To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press .

Features

 

247

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features

 

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 390

Bluetooth Indicator

MEDIA Button

Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Press to select

Bluetooth® Audio.

Audio/Information Screen

VOL/

(Volume/

MENU/CLOCK

Power) Knob

Button

Press to turn

Press to

the audio

display the

system on and

Pause Button (Preset 2)

menu items.

off.

Press to pause a file.

Turn to adjust

the volume.

Play Button (Preset 1)

Press to resume a file.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

Press or to change files.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

248

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

 

MEDIA Button

 

Pause Button

Play Button

Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.
Press the MEDIA button until the Bluetooth® Audio Source is selected.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions.

If any audio device is connected to the USB port, you may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

 

To pause or resume a file
Press a Play or Pause button to select a mode.

Features

Continued 249

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features

 

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob
Press to display the music search list.

Category

2. Rotate

to select a category.

Selection

 

Item

Selection 3. Press to display a list of items in the category.

Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is displayed.

 

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob

 

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the categories may not be displayed.

250

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with Display Audio

 

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY q or

ON w*1.

(Day/Night) Button

(Home) button: Press to go to the home

screen.

(Home) Button

2 Using the audio/information screen

(Map) Button*

P. 253

(Map) button*: Press to display the map

screen.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

(Audio) button: Press to display the

audio screen.

(Back) Button

(Phone) button: Press to display the

phone screen.

(Phone) Button

(Back) button: Press to go back to the

(Audio) Button

previous screen.

(Day/Night) button: Press to change

the audio/information screen brightness.

Press

once and select – or + to make

an adjustment.

u Each time you press

, the mode

switches among the daytime mode,

nighttime mode and off mode.

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Features

 

* Not available on all models 251

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Audio/Information Screen

 

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options.

Switching the Display
Using the button
Press the button to change the display.

 

1Using the button

 

You can edit, add, and delete the contents shown on the driver information interface.

Customizing the Meter P. 256
Button

Driver Information

Interface

252

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Using the audio/information screen

1Using the audio/information screen

Touchscreen operation

Home Screen

• Use simple gestures – including touching, swiping

and scrolling – to operate certain audio functions.

• Some items may be grayed out during driving to

reduce the potential for distraction.

• You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or

use voice commands.

• Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen

response.

You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.

2 Customized Features P. 350

 

Features

Press the button to go to the home screen.

Select the following icons on the home screen.

Phone
Displays the HFL information.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 410
Continued 253

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Info
Displays Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper, or System/Device Information. Select MENU on the Info Menu screen to see all available options: Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper and System/Device Information.

Trip Computer:

Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
History of Trip A tab: Displays information for the three previous drives. The information is stored every time you reset Trip A.
To delete the history manually, select Delete history on the History of Trip A tab. The confirmation message appears on the screen, then select Yes.

Voice Info: Displays a list of all voice commands.

Clock/Wallpaper: Displays the clock and wallpaper.

System/Device Information:

System Info: Displays the software version of the audio system.
USB Info: Displays the memory usage of the USB device.
Audio
Displays the current audio information.

Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.

Customized Features P. 350
254

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Navigation*
Displays the navigation screen.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

HondaLink®
Displays the HondaLink® screen.

2 HondaLink® P. 305

Smartphone Connection
Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

Apple CarPlay P. 313
Android Auto P. 316
App List ( )
Adds or removes apps or widgets on the Home screen.

2 Home Screen P. 262

Instrument Panel
Selects from three customizable settings for the driver information interface.

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 255

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout
Press the button.
Select and hold an icon.

u The screen switches to the customization screen.

Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.

Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home screen.

Customizing the Meter
You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents on the driver information interface.

button
Settings
System
Configuration of Instrument Panel

1Customizing the Meter

 

You can store up to three customized configurations. To select or customize a configuration, press Swap Config..

When you select Swap Config. during customization, the settings you changed will be saved.

When you press the button during customization, the settings you changed will not be saved and you will be returned to the Instrument Panel screen.

256

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Editing order
To change the order of the icons on the driver information interface, first select:

1. Edit Order

 

Edit Order

2. Select the icon you want to move.

u You will see arrows on both sides of the selected icon.

Select

3. Select the left or right arrow repeatedly to move the icon to your desired position.

Select OK.
u The screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

1Editing order

 

You can use an alternative method to change the order of the icons. First select:

Edit Order
Select and hold the icon you want to move.
Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
Select OK.
uThe screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

Features

 

Arrow Icons OK

Continued 257

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
■ Adding contents

1Adding contents

 

You can add icons to the driver information interface. To add icons, first select:

Icons that are grayed out cannot be selected.

12ᾉ34

Add

Features

Add

12ᾉ34

Range&

Maintenance

Speed unit &

Turbo Meter

Fuel

Minder TM

Disp Off

Phone

SMS & Mail

Navigation &

Compass

Select

Add

12ᾉ34

OK

258

 

1. Add

Select an icon you want to add.
u You will see a plus mark on the upper right hand corner of the selected icon.

Select OK.
u The screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

If an icon has a plus mark in the upper-right corner, it means that the icon has already been added.

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Deleting contents
To delete contents on the driver information interface, first select:

1. Delete

 

Delete

2. Select an icon you want to delete.

u The icon with an X on the upper right hand corner can be deleted.

Select

3. Select OK.

u The screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

1Deleting contents

 

You can also delete contents by selecting:

Delete or Edit Order
Select and hold an icon you want to delete.
Drag and drop the icon to the trash icon.
Select OK.
uThe screen will return to the Instrument Panel screen.

Features

 

OK

Continued 259

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

Import wallpaper
You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.

Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 227

Select Settings.
Select Clock.
Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab.
Select Add New.
u The picture name is displayed on the list.

Select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

Select Start Import to save the data. u The display will return to the wallpaper

list.

1Wallpaper Setup

 

The wallpaper you set up on Clock/Wallpaper Type cannot be displayed on the driver information interface.

When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.

The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 5 MB.
The maximum image size is 4,096 × 4,096 pixels. If the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No files detected message appears.
After changing the screen interface design, you can change the wallpaper by following procedure.

Press the button.
Select and hold empty space on the home screen. The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Select Change wallpaper.
Select Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.
260

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Select wallpaper
Select Settings.
Select Clock.
Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
Select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Set.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

To view wallpaper once it is set
Press the button.
Select Info.
Select MENU.
Select Clock/Wallpaper.
Delete wallpaper
Select Settings.
Select Clock.
Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
Select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Delete.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.

Select Yes to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup

 

From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a preview at full-size screen.

To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or press

the button.

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.

To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All, then Yes.

Features

 

Continued 261

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Home Screen
To change to a next screen

Swipe

Icon

Icon Current page position

Selecting or , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

1Home Screen

 

The home screen has 5 pages (fixed). You cannot add any more pages.

Press the button to go directly back to the first page of the home screen from any page.

262

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To use apps or widgets

Models without navigation system

(App list) Icon

Models with navigation system

App List Icon

Press the button.
Select App List or icon. u The App screen appears.
Select the app or widget you want to use.
Preinstall app list:

Calculator: Displays Calculator.
Downloads*1: Displays the data downloaded from the web browser and so on.
App Installer: Check with a Honda dealer for apps that are available for installation.
1To use apps or widgets

 

Select and hold a selected app or widget to add that app’s or widget’s shortcut on the home screen.

Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system.

Defaulting All the Settings P. 379
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default.

Defaulting All the Settings P. 379
In case those apps still do not startup normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.

Do not install apps other than those confirmed by a Honda dealer. Installation of unauthorized apps may introduce data corruption risks to your vehicle’s information and your privacy.

You can delete user installed apps by the following procedure.

Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Others tab.
Select Detail Information.
Select Apps.
Select an app that you want to delete.
Select Delete.
Pre-installed apps cannot be deleted.

Features

 

*1: Downloads app cannot be used because there is no Browser function in this system.

Continued 263

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

To add app or widget icons on the home screen App or widget icons can be added on the home screen.
Press the button.

2. Select .

Select and hold empty space on the home screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Add App or Add Widget. u The App/Widget screen appears.
Select and hold.

264

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Select and hold.

 

Drag and drop.

Select and hold an app or widget icon you want to add.
u The screen switches to the customization screen.

Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home

screen.

 

Features

Continued 265

Select and hold.

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen.
Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization screen.

Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.

3. Select OK.

u The screen will return to the home screen.

1To move icons on the home screen

 

You can also move the Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation*, HondaLink, Smartphone Connection, App List ( ), and Instrument Panel

icons in the same manner.

Drag and drop.

* Not available on all models
Continued

Drag and drop to the trash icon.

* Not available on all models

Select and hold.

You can delete the icons on the home screen.

1. Select and hold an icon.

u The screen switches to the customization screen.

2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove

to the trash icon.

u The icon is removed from the home screen.

3. Select OK.

u The screen will return to the home screen.

■ To remove icons on the home screen

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
1To remove icons on the home screen

You cannot delete the Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation*, HondaLink, Smartphone Connection, App List ( ), and Instrument Panel icons.

Deleting an app or widget from the home screen does not delete the app or widget itself.

 

Features

267

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

To change the home screen wallpaper You can change a wallpaper of the home screen.
Select and hold empty space on the home screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Change wallpaper.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select an app for selecting wallpapers.

4. Select your desired wallpaper.

Select Set wallpaper.
u The wallpaper is changed, then the screen will return to the home screen.

268

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Status Area
Swipe down from the top of the screen.

2.

u The status area appears.

Select an item to see the details.

3.

Press the

button or swipe up from the

Swipe

bottom bar to close the area.

 

Features

Status Area Bar

Continued 269

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Changing the Screen Interface
You can change the screen interface design.

Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Others tab.
Select Change Skin.
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.

1Changing the Screen Interface

 

After changing the screen interface design, you can change the wallpaper by following procedure.

Press the button.
Select and hold empty space on the home screen. The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Select Change wallpaper.
Select Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.
If you change the screen interface, some of the setting items will change.

Customized Features P. 350
270

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Menu Customize
You can change menu icons on the right side of Audio, Phone, and Info screen.

Select and hold menu icon.

1Menu Customize

 

You can also use the method below to change menu icon:

Select Settings System Home tab Menu Icon Position

Select and hold

To change

Menu Icons

Menu Icon

Select or icon, then Audio, Phone, or Info from Menu Customize.
3. Select and hold the menu icon you want to

change, then drag and drop the icon to the

bottom.

Features

 

Drag and drop

To add

4. Select and hold the menu icon you want to

add, then drag and drop the icon to above.

5. Select OK.

Drag and drop

Continued 271

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Closing Apps
You can close specific apps running in the background on the system.

Press and hold the button.

2. Select the Active tab.

u If you select the Active/History tab, you can close the apps that are currently running and delete the app activity history simultaneously.

Select an app you want to close.
Select Clear.
u The display will return to the app list.

1Closing Apps

 

If you have a number of apps running in the background and something goes wrong with the audio system, some of those apps may not work properly. If this happens, close all the apps and re-launch the app/apps that you want to use.

To close all apps on the system, select Clear All, then Yes.

You cannot close the HondaLink® and Garmin* apps.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound

 

Press the button.
Select MENU.
Select Sound.

Select a tab from the following choices:

 

BAS-MID-TRE: Bass, Middle, Treble
FAD-BAL*/FAD-BAL-SUBW*: Fader, Balance, Subwoofer*
SVC*/SVC∙Neural*: Speed Volume Compensation, DTS Neural SurroundTM*
1Adjusting the Sound

 

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

You can also turn on and off the DTS Neural SurroundTM setting* by selecting Neural on the audio/information screen.

Features

 

* Not available on all models 273

Audio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Display Setup

 

You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness

1Changing the Screen Brightness

 

12ᾉ34

 

1. Press the button.

2. Select Settings.

3. Select System.

4. Select the Display tab.

5. Select Display Settings.

6. Select the setting you want.

7. Select OK.

You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner.

Features

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme

1Changing the Screen’s Color Theme

12ᾉ34

 

1. Press the button.

2. Select Settings.

You cannot change the Background Color if you change the screen interface design.

Select System.
Select the Display tab.
Select Background Color.
Select the setting you want.
Select OK.
274

Selecting an Audio Source

Select the source icon.

Source Select Screen

Source List Icons

Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

 

Features

275

Audio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features

 

Voice Control Operation

 

Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation.

The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights in the ceiling.

 

Voice Recognition
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:

Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are using.
The system recognizes only certain commands. Available voice command P. 277

Close the windows and moonroof*.
Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone in the ceiling.
Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
1Voice Control Operation

 

When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.

1Voice Recognition

The voice control system can only be used from the driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passenger’s side.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Portal Screen

When the (Talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen.

For a complete list of commands, say “Voice Help” after the beep or select Voice Help.

You can see the list of commands in Voice Info on the Info Menu screen. Select Info, then select MENU.

The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free form voice commands are not recognized.

*1: Models with navigation system

Phone Call
This can be only used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone call command, the screen will change to the voice recognition screen for phone commands.

Dial by number
Call history
Redial
Call <Your contact Name>
Call <Phone Number>
Call Nine one one
Call Police
Phone Call commands are not available if using Apple CarPlay.

Music Search
This can be only used when the iPod or USB device is connected.

Climate Control*1
When the system recognizes the Climate Control command, the screen will change the dedicated screen to the climate control voice recognition screen.

Climate Control Commands*1 P. 279
Audio*1
When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change to the audio voice recognition screen.

Audio On*2
Audio Off*2
Radio FM
Radio AM
Radio SXM*
Pandora*
iPod
USB
Other Sources
Pandora® cannot be used while Android Auto is active.

Navigation*1
The screen changes to the navigation screen.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

HondaLink®
This can be only used when the phone is connected.

*2: These commands toggle the function on and off, so the command may not match your intended action.

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 277

Audio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features

 

278

Voice Setting
The screen changes to the Voice Recog.

tab on the System Settings screen.

Voice Help
You can see a list of the available commands on the screen.

Useful Commands*1
Phone Commands
Audio Commands*1
On Screen Commands
Music Search Commands
General Commands*1
Climate Control Commands*1
Useful Commands*1
The system accepts these commands on the voice portal top screen.

Call <Phone Number>
Call <Your contact Name>
What time is it?
What is today’s date?
*1: Models with navigation system

* Not available on all models

Phone Commands
The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone.

Call by number
Call by name
Call <Phone Number>
Call <Your contact Name>
Audio Commands*1
The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio.

Radio FM Commands
Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
Radio tune to <87.7 -107.9> HD <1-8>
FM

Radio FM preset <1-12>
Radio AM Commands
Radio tune to <530-1710> AM
Radio AM preset <1-6>
Radio SXM Commands*
SXM channel <1-999>
SXM channel <station name>
Radio SXM preset <1-12>
Pandora® Commands*
• PANDORA play

iPod Commands
iPod play
iPod play track <1-30>
Music Search
What album is this?
What am I listening to?
USB Commands
• USB play

• USB play track <1-30>

• Music Search

• What album is this?

• What am I listening to?

Bluetooth® audio Commands
• Bluetooth® audio play

NOTE:

Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio devices.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

On Screen Commands
When On Screen Commands is selected, the explanation screen is displayed.

Music Search Commands
The system accepts these commands on the Music Search screen.

Using Song By Voice
Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you to select music from your iPod or USB device using Voice Commands. To activate this mode, you must push the talk switch and say: “Music Search”.

Song By Voice Commands
• What am I listening to?

• Who am I listening to?

• Who is this?

• What’s playing?

• Who’s playing?

• What album is this?

*1: Models with navigation system

Play Commands
Play artist <Name>
Play track/song <Name>
Play album <Name>
Play genre/category <Name>
Play playlist <Name>
Play composer <Name>
List Commands
List artist <Name>
List album <Name>
List genre/category <Name>
List playlist <Name>
List composer <Name>
General Commands*1
What time is it?
What is today’s date?
Climate Control Commands*1

Climate control on*2
Climate control off*2
Fan speed <1-7>
Temperature max heat
Temperature max cool
Temperature <57-87> degrees*3
Temperature <15-29> degrees*4
Defrost On*2
Defrost Off*2
Air Conditioner On*2
Air Conditioner Off*2
More
Climate Control Automatic
Vent
Dash and floor
Fan speed Up
Fan speed Down
Floor vents
Floor and Defrost
Temperature up
Temperature down
*2: These commands toggle the function on and off, so the command may not match your intended action.

*3: U.S. models

*4: Canadian models

Features

 

279

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Playing AM/FM Radio

 

Features

 

MENU

Select to display the menu items.

(Audio) Button

Press to display the audio screen.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and

off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Scan Icon

Select to scan each station with a strong signal.

Driver Information Interface

Audio/Information Screen

Seek Icons

Select or to search the selected band up or down for a station with a strong signal.

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the detailed information.

Preset Icons

Tune the preset radio frequency.

Select and hold the preset icon to

store that station. Select to

display preset 7 onwards.

Tune Icons

Select or to tune the radio

frequency.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

280

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Preset Memory
To store a station:

Tune to the selected station.
Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
You can also store a preset station by the following procedure.

Tune to the selected station.
Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Preset tab.
Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Station List
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.

Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Station List tab.
Select the station.
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.

Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Station List tab.
Select Refresh.
Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn

off scan, select Cancel or press the button.

1Playing AM/FM Radio

 

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or

select SOURCE on the screen.

Audio Remote Controls P. 230
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into preset memory.

Models with HD RadioTM feature

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see http://dts.com/patents. HD Radio, Artist Experience, and the HD, HD Radio, and “ARC” logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

HD RadioTM stations not available in all locations in Canada.

Features

 

Continued 281

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features

 

Models with HD RadioTM feature

HD Subchannel
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station.

Select MENU.
Select HD Radio Subchannel.
Select the channel number.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List
Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
Select the Station List tab.
Select the station.
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.

Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
Select the Station List tab.
Select Refresh.
Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

Select MENU.
Select View Radio Text.
1Radio Data System (RDS)

 

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

282

Playing SiriusXM® Radio*

 

Driver Information Interface

Audio/Information Screen

MENU

Select to display the menu items.

Album Art

(Audio) Button

Press to display the audio screen.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Scan Icon

Select to scan each channel.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

* Not available on all models

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*

Channel Icons

Select or to the previous or next channel.

Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.

Skip Icons

Select or to change section in the channel.

Select and hold to move rapidly within the section.

Station Art

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the detailed information.

Preset Icons

Tune the preset radio station.

Select and hold the preset icon to

store that station. Select to

display preset 7 onwards.

Category Icons

Select or to display and select

a SiriusXM® Radio category.

Continued

Features

 

283

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
To Change the Tune Mode
Select MENU.
Select Tune Mode.
Select Channel Mode or Category Mode.

Features

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio*

 

In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or

select SOURCE on the screen.

Audio Remote Controls P. 230
Tune Start:

When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off from the Audio Settings screen.

Customized Features P. 350
* Not available on all models
Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Preset Memory
To store a channel:

Tune to the selected channel.
Press and hold the preset number for the station you want to store. u If Multiple Channel Mix Preset setting to On, then select Replace.
You can also store a channel by the following procedure.

Tune to the selected channel.
Select the open/close icon to display a list.
Select the Preset tab.
Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
You can store up to five of your preferred music channels to preset numbers.

Tune a station.
Select the open/close icon to display a list.

3. Select the Preset tab.

Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel.

u A message appears if there are no available presets.

Select Combine.
1Playing SiriusXM® Radio*

 

You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset memory.

1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)

To store a multi-channel preset, you need to setup the Multiple Channel Mix Preset setting to On.

Customized Features P. 350
Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 285

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Listening to Featured Channels
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected.

Select the open/close icon to display a channel list.
Select the Channel tab.
Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to. u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
Select the channel.

1Listening to Featured Channels

 

Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be displayed.

Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel list.

Features

286

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Replay Function
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes of your currently tuned channel’s broadcast, as well as the last 30 minutes of your preset channel’s broadcast, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to a preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.

Select MENU.
Select Playback.
Move the time marker to the position you want to replay.
The following items are available on the pop-up screen:

(Skip Down): Skips to the previously stored channel. Select and hold to fast-rewind the current selection.

(Skip Up): Skips to the next channel. Select and hold to fast-forward the current selection.

(15sec Back): Select to skip back 15 seconds in the current selection. Select and hold to fast-rewind the current selection.

(15sec Skip): Select to skip forward 15 seconds in the current selection. Select and hold to fast-forward the current selection.

u Select OK to close the pop-up menu. Replay in playback mode continues.

To play or pause on playback mode:

Select MENU.
Select Play/Pause.
1Replay Function

 

The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point.

You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen.

After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data.

Audio/Information Screen

(A)

(B)

(C)

(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment

(C): Length stored in memory

When you listen a multi-channel preset while at the playback mode, the replayed segment is not displayed.

Features

 

Continued 287

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Features

 

Returning to real-time broadcast
Select MENU.
Select Go to Live.
Live Sports Alert
While listening to other channels, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from the games of your favorite teams.

To set up a favorite team
Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select Audio.
Select SportsFlash Setup.
Select Favorite Team.
Select a team.

To set up an alert message
Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select Audio.
Select SportsFlash Setup.
Select Interrupt.
Select On(One Time) or On(Continue).
1Live Sports Alert

 

The sports alert function is available in SiriusXM® mode only.

1To set up a favorite team

Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on. Selecting On(One Time) from the customized settings disables the alert feature next time you turn the power mode to ON.

Customized Features P. 350
You can also set up a favorite team by the following procedure.

Select Audio.
Select MENU.
Select Setting.
Select SportsFlash Setup.
288

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
To set up an alert beep
Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select Audio.
Select SportsFlash Setup.
Select Interrupt Beep.
Select On.
Receiving a sports alert
A pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert.
Select Listen.
u You can use the same items as the playback mode pop-up screen.

Replay Function P. 287
To go back to the previous screen, select Back.

Listening to a missed sports alert If you have missed a sports alert:
Select MENU.
Select SportsFlash List.
Select alert.
1To set up an alert beep

 

You can also set up a alert beep by the following procedure.

Select Audio.
Select MENU.
Select Setting.
Select SportsFlash Setup.
Features

 

Continued 289

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio*
Features

 

Traffic and Weather Information
You can receive traffic and weather information.

To set up a traffic & weather information
Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select Audio.
Select Traffic & Weather Setup.
Select the region.
u When you do not want to receive the information, select Unregistered.

Listening a traffic and weather information
Select MENU.
Select Traffic & Weather.
u Play mode can also use the any items same as playback mode.

2 Replay Function P. 287

To go back to the previous screen, select OK.

Scan
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds.

Select Scan.
Select Scan Channels.
u You can select the desired channel by songs using Scan Song in Preset.

To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.

1Traffic and Weather Information

 

The traffic and weather information function at SiriusXM® mode only.

You can also set up the traffic and weather information by the following procedure.

Select Audio.
Select MENU.
Select Setting.
Select Traffic & Weather Setup.
Traffic & Weather Now are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.

1Scan

The “Scan Songs in Preset” function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®.

The “Featured Channels” function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®.

TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.

290

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod

 

Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then select the iPod mode.

USB Port(s) P. 227

MENU

Select to display the menu items.

Cover Art

(Audio) Button

Press to display the audio screen.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power

Audio) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

Play/Pause Icon

and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Driver Information Interface

Audio/Information Screen

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the detailed information.

Song Icons

Select or to change

songs.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

Features

 

Continued 291

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features

 

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Select MENU and select Music Search.

Category

Selection

2. Select the items on that menu.

1Playing an iPod

 

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 320
If you operate any music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary.

Item Selection

292

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a song.

Select a play mode.

 

To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.

1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle Albums*1: Plays all available albums in a selected list in random order.

Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle: Plays all available songs in a selected list in random order. Repeat: Repeats the song.

*1: This function is not available if your iPod is not supported.

Features

 

293

Audio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Features

 

Song By VoiceTM (SBV)

 

Use SBV to search for and play music from your USB flash drive or iPod using voice commands.

To enable SBV
Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select System.

4. Select the Voice Recog. tab.

5. Select Song by Voice.

Select On or Off.
1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)

 

Setting options:

On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands are available.
Off: Disable the feature.
294

Audio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Searching for music using SBV
Set the Song by Voice setting to On.
Press the (Talk) button and say “Music Search” to activate the SBV feature for the USB flash drive and iPod.
Then, say a next command.

u Example 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’” to view a list of songs by that artist. Select the desired song to start playing.

u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’” to start

playing songs by that artist.

To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/ back) button on the steering wheel. The selected song continues playing.
Once you have canceled this mode, you need to press the button and say “Music Search” again to re-activate this mode.

1Searching for music using SBV

 

Song By VoiceTM Commands List

Song By Voice Commands P. 279
NOTE:

Song By VoiceTM commands are available for files or songs stored on the USB flash drive or iPod.

You can add phonetic modifications of difficult words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.

Phonetic Modification P. 296
Features

 

Continued 295

Audio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Features

 

Phonetic Modification
Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when searching for music on the USB flash drive or iPod.

Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Song by Voice Phonetic Modification.
Select New Modification.
Select USB or iPod.

1Phonetic Modification

 

Song by Voice Phonetic Modification function is not available when Song by Voice is set to Off.

You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification items.

296

Audio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
Select the item to modify (e.g., Artist). u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen.

Select an entry to modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

u To listen to the current phonetic modification, select Play.

u To delete the current phonetic modification, select Delete.

Select Modify.
Select the phonetic spelling you want to use (e.g., “Artist A”) when prompted.
Select OK.
u The artist “No Name” is phonetically modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV mode, you can press the (Talk) button and use the voice command “Play ‘Artist A’” to play songs by the artist “No Name.”

 

Features

 

297

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®*1
Playing Pandora®*1

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a compatible smartphone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using your USB cable to the USB port.

Phone Setup P. 418
USB Port(s) P. 227

1Playing Pandora®*1

 

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora website for more information.

To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.

MENU

Select to display

the menu items.

Features

Cover Art

(Audio) Button

 

Press to display the

audio screen.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Driver

Information

Interface

Audio/

Information

Screen

Like/Dislike Icons

Select to evaluate a track.

Play/Pause Icon

Select to pause or

play a track.

Skip Icon

Select to skip a track.

Station Up/Down Icons

Select to change a station.

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information.

Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, tracks, comedians or composers and Pandora® will create a custom station that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.

If your phone is connected to Android Auto, Pandora® is only available through the Android Auto interface. Visit the Android Auto website to check compatibility.

*1: Available only on U.S. models.

298

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora®*1

Pandora® Menu
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio system. The available items are:

Bookmark
Station List
New Station
Switch USB device
Sound
Setting
Operating a menu item
Select MENU.
Select an item.

1Pandora® Menu

 

Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

Pandora®* P. 322
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play.

To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu, select Station List, and then select a new station. It also changes stations on the main Pandora® screen.

Features

 

* Not available on all models 299

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, AAC*1, or WAV format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.

USB Port(s) P. 227

Features

 

MENU

Select to display the menu items.

(Audio) Button

Press to display the audio screen.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power Audio) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off. Turn to adjust the

volume.

Driver Information Interface

Audio/Information Screen

Track Icons

Select or to change files.

Select and hold to move rapidly within a file.

Open/Close Icon*2

Displays/hides the detailed information.

Folder Icons

Select to skip to the next folder,

and to skip to the beginning of

the previous folder.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

300

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

How to Select a File from the Music Search List
Select MENU and select Music Search.
Select Music.

Folder Selection

3. Select a folder.

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

General Information on the Audio System P. 324
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

 

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 320
Features

File Selection

4. Select a file.

Continued 301

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features

 

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.

■ Scan

 

1. Select MENU.

2. Select Scan.

3. Select a play mode.

■ Random/Repeat

 

Select a play mode.

1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.

Random/Repeat

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.

To turn off a play mode
To turn off Scan, press the button or select Cancel.

To turn off Random/Repeat, select the mode again.

302

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 418

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible. For a list of compatible phones:

• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,

or call 1-888-528-7876.

• Canada: For more information on smartphone

MENU

Select to display the menu items.

(Audio) Button

Press to display the audio screen.

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power

Audio) Knob

Press to turn the

audio system on and

off. Turn to adjust the

volume.

Play Icon

Driver Information Interface

Audio/Information Screen

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Open/Close Icon*1

Displays/hides the

detailed

information.

Track Icons

Select or to

change tracks.

Group Icons

Select or to change group.

Pause Icon

compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.

It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the system automatically connects to the prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone in the Priority Device Settings.

Customized Features P. 350
The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be different.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone is unavailable. However, a second previously paired phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting

Features

 

*1:Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Connect from the Bluetooth Device List.

Phone Setup P. 418
Continued 303

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features

 

To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
Make sure that your phone is paired and

connected to the system.

2 Phone Setup P. 418

2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.

To pause or resume a file Select the play icon or pause icon.
Searching for Music
Select MENU.
Select Music Search.
Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.

 

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

 

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

You can change the connected phone in the Bluetooth® settings on the Audio Menu screen by the following procedure.

Select MENU.
Select Setting.
1Searching for Music

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

304

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
HondaLink®

 

HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.

Wi-Fi Connection P. 310
Phone Setup P. 418
HondaLink® Menu

1HondaLink®

The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package.

When Apple CarPlay or Android Auto is connected to the audio system, HondaLink® can be accessed even without a Wi-Fi connection.

 

Features

Places*
Displays restaurants, gas stations, Honda dealer, and so on. You can also navigate to the found locations via the navigation.

Vehicle
Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.

Help & Support
Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service center.

* Not available on all models Continued 305

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features

 

Messages from Honda
Displays helpful and important information from Honda.

Weather*
Displays a weekly five-day weather forecast for any location you want. You can change the ZIP Code at any time.

To Set Up to Connect HondaLink® Service
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service.

To enable the HondaLink® service
Press the button.

2. Select Settings.

Select Info.
Select the HondaLink tab.
Select Diagnostic & Location Data.
Select On.
You need to allow the consent of the location

service to enable the HondaLink® service.

Enable once: Allows only one time. (Prompt

 

shows again next time.)

Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt

does not show again.)

Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

To link with HondaLink®
You can see the Connection Guide screen

 

after launching HondaLink®. If you do not

need this guide, select check-box and select

OK.

 

Features

Continued 307

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features

 

Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation.

A message appears and notifies you of a

new message on the header area.

u When the message is received, a

notification ring can be heard.

Message

Icon

2. A message icon is continuously displayed in

the header area until the new message is

read.

308

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

From the top of the screen, swipe down to see the messages.

4. Select a new message to open.

 

Features

309

Audio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Features

 

Wi-Fi Connection

 

You can connect the Display Audio to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites or use online services on the audio/information screen. If your phone has wireless hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following steps to setup.

Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi.
Select the Wi-Fi tab.
Select Wi-Fi On/Off Status, then On.
Select Wi-Fi Device List.
u Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.

u Select the phone you want to connect to the system.

u If you do not find the phone you want to connect in the list, select Scan.

Select Connect.

u If needed, enter a password for your

12ᾉ34

phone and select OK.

AAAAA

u When the connection is successful, the

BBBBB

icon is displayed on the top of the

CCCCC

DDDDD

screen.

EEEEE

 

Press the button to go back to the home screen.
1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)

 

You cannot go through the setting procedure while a vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to setup the Wi-Fi connection.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package.

Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity.

You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or

off with the icon on Wi-Fi Device List. Network speed will not be displayed on this screen.

310

Audio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.

1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)

 

iPhone users

You may need to go through an initial setup for Wi-Fi connection again after you boot your phone.

 

Features

311

Audio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free
Features

 

Siri Eyes Free

 

You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 418
Using Siri Eyes Free

Appears when Siri is activated in Siri Eyes Free

While in Siri Eyes Free:

The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.

(Talk) Button

Press and hold until the display changes

as shown.

Press again to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.

1Siri Eyes Free

 

Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.

We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri Eyes Free while operating a vehicle.

1Using Siri Eyes Free

Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.

312

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay

 

If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the 1.5A USB port, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.

USB Port(s) P. 227
Apple CarPlay Menu

Home screen Apple CarPlay menu screen

: Select the

Honda Icon to

return to the

Home screen

: Go back to the

Apple CarPlay Icon

Apple CarPlay

Dashboard screen

: Go back to the

Apple CarPlay menu

screen

Phone
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.

Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.

1Apple CarPlay

 

Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlay.

Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible apps.

To use Apple CarPlay, connect the USB cable to the 1.5A USB port. The USB port located in the center console storage will not enable Apple CarPlay operation.

USB Port(s) P. 227
To directly access the Apple CarPlay phone function, press Phone on the home screen. While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone.

Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 314
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected.

Phone Setup P. 418
For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

Features

 

Continued 313

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features

 

Maps
Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.

Models with navigation system

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.

Setting Up Apple CarPlay
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the 1.5A USB port, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the Display Audio Screen.

Enabling Apple CarPlay
Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt shows again next time.)

 

Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.)

Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu.

1Apple CarPlay

 

Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations

Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.

1Setting Up Apple CarPlay

You can also use the method below to set up Apple CarPlay:

Press the button Select Settings Smartphone Apple CarPlay

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to /from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apple’s Privacy Policy.

314

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri.

 

(Talk) button:

Press and hold to activate Siri.

Press again to deactivate Siri.

Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

 

Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri.

What movies are playing today?
Call dad at work.
What song is this?
How’s the weather tomorrow?
Read my latest email.
Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit

www.apple.com/ios/siri.

Features

 

315

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features

 

Android Auto

 

When you connect an Android phone to the Display Audio system via the 1.5A USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen.

We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto.

USB Port(s) P. 227
Auto Pairing Connection P. 318
1Android Auto

 

To use Android Auto, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone.

Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android Auto.

Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used with Android Auto phone.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps.

To use Android Auto, connect the USB cable to the 1.5A USB port. The USB port in the center console storage will not enable Android Auto operation.

USB Port(s) P. 227
When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is connected.

Phone Setup P. 418
316

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Android Auto Menu

6

Button: Go back to the Home screen

Android Auto Icon

a Maps (Navigation)

Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs.

Models with navigation system

 

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.

The audio/information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination.

b Phone (Communication)

Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.

c Google Now (Home screen)

Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when they’re needed.

1Android Auto

 

For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.

Screens may differ depending on the version of the Android Auto app you are using.

Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations

Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.

Features

 

Continued 317

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features

 

d Music and audio

Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto.

To switch between music apps, press this icon.

e Go back to the Home Screen.

Voice
Operate Android Auto with your voice.

Auto Pairing Connection
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the 1.5A USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated.

Enabling Android Auto
Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt shows again next time.)

 

Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.)

Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu.

1Enabling Android Auto

 

Only initialize Android Auto when you safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.

You can use the method below to change Android Auto settings after you have completed the initial setup:

Press the button Select Settings Smartphone Android Auto

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to /from your phone by Android Auto is governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy.

318

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Press and hold the talk button to operate Android Auto with your voice.

 

(Talk) button:

Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice.

Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

(Hang-up/back) button:

Press to deactivate voice recognition.

1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition

 

Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition:

Reply to text.
Call my wife.
Navigate to Honda.
Play my music.
Send a text message to my wife.
Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.

You can also activate the voice recognition function by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.

Features

 

319

 

Features

Audio Error Messages

iPod/USB Flash Drive

 

If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message

Solution

USB Error*1, *2

Appears when there is a problem with the audio system. Check if the device is

compatible with the audio system.

Bad USB Device

Please Check Owners Manual*1

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn

A charging error has occurred with the

the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the

connected USB device. When safe please

error.

check the compatibility of the device and

USB cable and try again.*2

Unsupported Ver*1

Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod

Unsupported Version*2

is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.

Retry Connection*1

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

Connect Retry*2

Unplayable File*1, *2

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are copyright protected or an unsupported

format. This error message appears for about three seconds, then plays the next song.

*1:Models with color audio system

*2:Models with Display Audio

320

Audio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Error Message

Solution

iPod

Appears when the iPod is empty.

USB No Song*1

USB flash drive

iPod No Song*1

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, AAC, or WAV*2

No Data*2

files in the USB flash drive.

iPod and USB flash drive

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.

Unsupported*1, *2

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported

device is connected, reconnect the device.

*1:Models with color audio system

*2:Models with Display Audio

Features

 

321

 

Features

Audio Error MessagesuPandora®*
U.S. models

 

Pandora®*

 

If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.

If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message

Solution

To begin listening, select a station from the Stations list.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device

to create a station.

The maximum number of tracks that can be skipped has been

Appears when you try to skip a track or select Like/Dislike over

reached.

the predetermined number of times in an hour.

Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again later.

Unable to rate track. Please try again.

Appears when the commanded operation fails. Try again later.

Unable to save bookmark.

No Data

Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.

Reboot the app and reconnect the device.

PANDORA App version is not supported.

Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update

Pandora® to the latest version.

PANDORA system maintenance.

Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again

later.

Unable to connect to PANDORA. When stopped, check your

Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your

mobile phone.

device.

Unable to connect to PANDORA. When stopped, check your

Appears when Pandora® app is not installed on your device. Install

mobile phone.

Pandora® app to your device.

* Not available on all models
uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps

Models with Display Audio

Android/Apps

 

If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message*1

Solution

Unfortunately, **** has

Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app.

stopped.

App is not responding.

**** is not responding.

Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep

waiting, select OK to close the app and restart it. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data

Would you like to close it?

Reset.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 379

*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error occurs.

Features

 

323

General Information on the Audio System

Features

 

SiriusXM® Radio Service*

 

Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID on the screen, select Channel 0.
Have your radio ID ready, and either call SiriusXM® or visit the SiriusXM® website to subscribe.
Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.

1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio

 

Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:

U.S.: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com/ subscribenow, or 1-866-635-2349
Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.siriusxm.ca/ subscribe-now, or (877) 209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio

The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.

You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances:

In a location with an obstruction to the south of your vehicle.
In tunnels
On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
Large items carried on the roof rack
* Not available on all models
General Information on the Audio SystemuSiriusXM® Radio Service*
SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
Requested Channel Not Subscribed:

You are not subscribed to the channel selected.

Channel Off Air:

The channel is not currently broadcasting.

Channel unauthorized:

SiriusXM® is loading the audio or program information.

Subscription Updated.:

SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.

Channel Not Available:

No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable.

No Signal:

The signal is too weak in the current location.

Check Antenna:

There is a problem with the SiriusXM® antenna. Contact a dealer.

Check Tuner:

There is a problem with the SiriusXM® tuner. Contact a dealer.

Features

 

325

General Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Features

 

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

Model

iPod (5th generation)

iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)

iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)

iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)

iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012 iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2007 and 2012 iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5c*1/iPhone 5s*1/ iPhone 6*1/iPhone 6 Plus*1

*1:Models with Display Audio

USB Flash Drives
A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, or WAV* formats may be unsupported.
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

 

This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.

1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.

* Not available on all models
General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Honda App License Agreement

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.

A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.

B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.

SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the “HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE.
Features

 

Continued 327

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE.
Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.
Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
328

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION;
access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;
access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way;
use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights;
use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations;
violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or
reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses.
Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers.
Features

 

Continued 329

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation

HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES.
Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content.
330

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the-air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings

Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
Features

 

Continued 331

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
332

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
E. Information Collection and Storage

Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE (“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
Features

 

Continued 333

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non-infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you.

G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.

Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
334

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length.
(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.

Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.
Features

 

Continued 335

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

K. Termination and Transfer.

Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
336

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.

M.ARBITRATION:

PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION.

Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.

YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.

Features

 

Continued 337

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA.

This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.

N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.

338

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Models with Display Audio

 

Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS

USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.

USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.

Features

 

Continued 339

General Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Features

 

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.

TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

340

General Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses
About Open Source Licenses

 

To see the open source license information, follow these steps.

Models with color audio system

 

Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Settings, then press .
Rotate to select OSS Licenses, then press .

Models with Display Audio

 

Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Others tab.
Select Detail Information.
Select About device.
Select Legal information.
Select Open source licenses.
1About Open Source Licenses

 

Models with color audio system

LICENCE: Copyright © 2001 Bob Trower, Trantor Standard Systems Inc.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Features

 

341

General Information on the Audio SystemuLicense information*
License information*

 

DTS
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Digital Surround and Neural Surround are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

 

Features

* Not available on all models
Customized Features

Models with color audio system

 

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON w, press the MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings, press the button, then select Phone Setup.

 

Audio/Information Screen

(Phone) Button

1Customized Features

 

When you customize settings:

Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Shift to (P.
1How to customize

These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob.

Rotate to select. Press to enter.

 

Features

MENU/CLOCK Button

Selector Knob

Continued 343

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Customization Flow
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.

 

Adjust Clock

RDS Information

Settings

RDS Settings

Radio Text

Add New Device

Bluetooth

Connect an Audio Device

Brightness

Display Adjustment

Contrast

Black Level

Camera Guideline

Rear Camera

 

344

Customized Featuresu

Display Change

Audio

Wallpaper

Select

Wallpaper

Import

Delete

Blue

Color Theme

Red

Amber

Gray

Language

12h

Clock Format

24h

 

OSS Licenses

 

Features

 

Continued 345

 

Features

Customized Featuresu
Press the button and rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

 

Bluetooth Setup

Add New Device

Connect a Phone

Connect an Audio Device

Disconnect All Devices

Delete Device

Pass-Key

 

Speed Dial

 

Auto Transfer

 

Ringtone

Mobile Phone

Fixed

Caller ID Info

Name Priority

Number Priority

 

System Clear

 

346

uuCustomized Featuresu

List of customizable options
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Adjust Clock

Adjust Clock.

2 Clock P. 144

RDS

RDS Information

Turns on and off the RDS information.

On*1/Off

Settings

Radio Text

Displays the radio text information.

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a

Add New Device

paired phone, and create a code for a paired

phone.

Bluetooth

2 Phone Setup P. 390

Settings

Connect an Audio

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®

Device

Audio device to HFL.

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/

information screen.

Display

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/

Adjustment

information screen.

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/

information screen.

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 347

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Rear

Camera Guideline

Selects whether the guidelines come on the

On*1/Off

Camera

audio/information screen.

Display Change

Changes the display type.

Audio*1/Wallpaper

Select

Changes the wallpaper type.

Clock*1/Image1/Image2/

Image3

Wallpaper

Import

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

2 Wallpaper Setup P. 236

Settings

Delete

Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Image1*1/Image2/Image3

Color Theme

Changes the background color of the audio/

Blue*1/Red/Amber/Gray

information screen.

Features

Clock Format

Changes the display language.

12H*1/24H

Language

English*1/French/Spanish

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to

24H.

OSS Licenses

Shows the legal information.

*1:Default Setting

348

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Add New Device

Pairs a new phone to HFL.

2 Phone Setup P. 390

Connect a Phone

Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone

to HFL.

Bluetooth

2 Phone Setup P. 390

Setup

Connect an Audio

Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL.

Device

Disconnect All Devices

Disconnects a paired phone from HFL.

Delete Device

Deletes a paired phone.

Phone

Pass-Key

Inputs and changes a code for a paired phone.

Features

Setup

Speed Dial

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

2 Speed Dial P. 400

Auto Transfer

Sets calls to automatically transfer from your

On*1/Off

phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

Ringtone

Selects a fixed ring tone or the one from the

Mobile Phone*1/Fixed

connected cell phone.

Caller ID Info

Prioritizes the caller’s name or phone number

Name Priority*1/Number

as the caller ID.

Priority

System Clear

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Phone Setup group as default.

*1:Default Setting

349

Customized Features

Features

 

Models with Display Audio

 

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON w*1, press the button, and select Settings, then select a setting item.

 

Audio/Information

Screen

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Customized Features

 

When you customize settings:

Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Continuously variable transmission models

Shift to (P.
Manual transmission models

Set the parking brake.
To customize features detail, refer to the following.

Customization flow P. 351
List of customizable options P. 359
350

uuCustomized Featuresu

Customization flow
Select Settings.

 

Clock

 

Info

 

Clock

 

HondaLink

 

Others

 

Default

 

Clock

 

Clock/Wallpaper Type*1/Clock Type*2

 

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone*

 

Manual Time Zone

Auto Daylight Saving Time

 

Clock Format

 

Clock Display

 

Overlay Clock Location

 

Clock Reset

 

Diagnostic & Location Data

 

Info Screen Preference

 

Clock/Wallpaper Type*1/Clock Type*2

 

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone*

 

Manual Time Zone

Auto Daylight Saving Time

 

Clock Format

 

Clock Display

 

Overlay Clock Location

 

Clock Reset

 

Clock

 

Wallpaper

 

Clock

 

Wallpaper

 

Features

 

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*2: Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models Continued 351

Customized Featuresu

Features

 

HondaLink

 

Others

 

Default

 

Camera

Rear Camera

 

LaneWatch*

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi

Bluetooth

 

Wi-Fi

Default

 

Smartphone Apple CarPlay

 

Android Auto

Default

 

Diagnostic & Location Data

 

Info Screen Preference

 

Fixed Guideline

 

Dynamic Guideline

 

Default

 

Show with Turn Signal

 

Display Time after Turn Signal Off

Reference Line

Default

Bluetooth On/Off Status Bluetooth Device List Priority Device Settings Edit Pairing Code Wi-Fi On/Off Status Wi-Fi Device List Wi-Fi Information

 

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu

Phone

 

Audio

 

Phone

 

Text/Email

Default

 

FM/AM

 

SXM*

 

Bluetooth

 

Other

 

Default

 

Sound

 

Bluetooth Device List

 

Edit Speed Dial

Ring Tone

Automatic Phone Sync

HondaLink Assist

Enable Text/Email

 

Select Account

New Message Notification

HD Radio Mode (FM)*

 

HD Radio Mode (AM)*

RDS INFO

Tune Start

 

SportsFlash Setup

 

Traffic & Weather Setup

 

Multiple Channel Mix Preset

 

Bluetooth Device List

 

Cover Art

 

Audio Source Pop-Up

 

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 353

Customized Featuresu

Features

 

System

 

Home

 

Display

 

Sound/Beep

 

Home Screen Edit Order Menu Icon Position*2 Configuration of Instrument Panel Tachometer Setting

 

Display Settings

Brightness

Contrast

Black Level

Background Color*1

Blue

Amber

Red

Violet

BlueGreen

 

Touch Panel Sensitivity

 

Guidance Volume

 

Text Message Volume

 

Voice Recog. Volume

 

Meter Volume – List Reading

 

Meter Volume – Alphabetic Reading

 

Verbal Reminder*

 

Beep Volume

 

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*2: Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu

Voice Recog.

 

One Press Voice Operation

 

Voice Prompt

 

Voice Recog. Volume

 

Song by Voice

 

Song by Voice Phonetic Modification Phonebook Phonetic Modification Automatic Phone Sync

 

Clock

Clock/Wallpaper Type*1/

Clock

Clock Type*2

Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment

 

Auto Time Zone*

 

Manual Time Zone

 

Auto Daylight Saving Time

 

Clock Format

 

Clock Display

 

Overlay Clock Location

 

Clock Reset

 

Features

 

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*2: Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models Continued 355

Customized Featuresu

Features

 

Others

 

Default

 

Language

 

Voice Command Tips*

 

Remember Last Screen*1 Memory Refresh Refresh Time Adjustment Change Skin

 

Factory Data Reset

 

Climate Screen Timeout

 

Detail Information

 

*1: Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu

Vehicle

 

TPMS Calibration*

Cancel

Calibrate

Forward Collision Warning Distance

Driver Assist System Setup

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

Road Departure Mitigation Setting

Rev Match System*

Meter Setup

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

“Trip A” Reset Timing

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Adjust Alarm Volume

Shift Up Backlight*

Shift Up Alarm*

Fuel Efficiency Backlight*

Turn By Turn Auto Display

New Message Notifications

Speed/Distance Units

Tachometer

Gear Position Display*

 

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 357

Customized Featuresu

Features

Keyless Access Setup*

 

Lighting Setup

Door/Window Setup

Maintenance Info.

Default

Remote Start System ON/OFF* Door Unlock Mode Keyless Access Light Flash Keyless Access Beep

 

Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer Auto Light Sensitivity*

Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON

Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock Key and Remote Unlock Mode Keyless Lock Answer Back Security Relock Timer Walk Away Auto Lock*

* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu

■ List of customizable options

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Clock/ Clock

Wallpaper

Type*1/

Clock Wallpaper

Type*2

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone*

Clock

Clock

See Info on P. 360

Manual Time Zone

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Clock Format

Clock Display

Overlay Clock Location

Clock Reset

*1:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*2:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 359

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

HondaLink

Diagnostic & Location Data

See Info on P. 360

Clock

Others

Info Screen Preference

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Clock

Yes/No

settings group as default.

Clock/

Clock

Changes the clock display type.

Analog/Digital*1/

Small Digital/Off

Wallpaper

Type*2/

Changes the wallpaper type.

Blank/Galaxy*1/

Clock

Wallpaper

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

Type*3

Metallic/Time Zone*

Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Clock Adjustment

Adjusts Clock.

Info

Clock

Auto Time Zone*

Automatically adjusts the clock when driving

On*1/Off

through different time zones.

Manual Time Zone

Changes the time zone manually.

Select On to have the GPS automatically adjust

Auto Daylight Saving Time

the clock to daylight savings time. Select Off to

On*1/Off

cancel this function.

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.

12H*1/24H

*1:Default Setting

*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*3:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Clock Display

Selects whether the clock display comes on.

On*1/Off

Upper Right*1/Upper

Clock

Overlay Clock Location

Changes the clock display layout.

Left/Lower Right/

Lower Left/Off

Clock Reset

Resets the clock settings to the factory default.

Yes/No

Info

HondaLink

Diagnostic & Location

Turns HondaLink® on and off.

On*1/Off

Data

Selects the top menu when the Info is selected.

Others

Info Screen Preference

Info Top- A brief menu pops up.

Info Top/Info

Info Menu- A full menu pops up.

Menu*1/Off

Off- A menu does not pop up.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info

Yes/No

settings group as default.

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 361

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Fixed Guideline

Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on

On*1/Off

the rear camera monitor.

 

Multi-View Rear Camera P. 560
Rear

Dynamic Guideline

Selects whether the guidelines adjust to the

On*1/Off

Camera

movement of the steering wheel.

Multi-View Rear Camera P. 560
Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear

Yes/No

Camera setting group as default.

Camera

Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes

Show with Turn Signal

on when you move the turn signal lever to

On*1/Off

indicate a right turn.

Display Time after Turn

Changes the length of time the LaneWatch

0 second*1/

display stays on after the turn signal lever

LaneWatch*

Signal Off

2 seconds

returns to the center.

Reference Line

Selects whether the reference lines come on the

On*1/Off

LaneWatch monitor.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Yes/No

LaneWatch group as default.

*1:Default Setting

 

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Bluetooth On/Off Status

Changes the Bluetooth® status.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a

paired phone.

Phone Setup P. 418
Enables the system to or disables it from

Priority On/

automatically establishing a connection with a

On/Off*1

Bluetooth/

Off Status

Bluetooth® device which has been assigned

Bluetooth

Priority

priority.

Wi-Fi

Device

Selects the priority device over another paired

Settings

Audio

audio device(s).

Phone

Selects the priority device over another paired

phone(s).

Edit Pairing Code

Edits a pairing code.

Random/Fixed*1

2 To change the pairing code setting P. 419

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 363

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Wi-Fi On/Off Status

Changes the Wi-Fi mode.

On/Off*1

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Device List

Connects, disconnects, or deletes the Wi-Fi

Bluetooth/

device.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Information

Shows the Wi-Fi information of the head unit.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Yes/No

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi group as default.

Apple CarPlay

Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection.

Features

Smartphone

Android Auto

Sets up the Android Auto connection.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Yes/No

Smartphone group as default.

*1:Default Setting

364

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or

disconnects a paired phone.

Phone Setup P. 418
Edit Speed Dial

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

2 Speed Dial P. 424

Phone

Ring Tone

Selects a fixed ring tone or the one from the

Fixed/Mobile

connected cell phone.

Phone*1

Sets a phonebook and call history data to be

Automatic Phone Sync

automatically imported when a phone is paired

On*1/Off

Phone

to HFL.

HondaLink Assist

Turns HondaLink Assist on and off.

On/Off*1

Enable Text/Email

Turns the text/e-mail message function on and

On*1/Off

off.

Text/Email

Select Account

Selects a text or e-mail message account.

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the

New Message Notification

screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail

On/Off

message.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone

Yes/No

settings group as default.

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 365

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Selects whether the audio system automatically

HD Radio Mode*

switches to the digital radio waves or receives the

Auto*1/Analog Only

FM/AM mode

analog waves only.

FM/AM

RDS INFO

Turns on and off the RDS information.

On*1/Off

Tune Start

Turns on and off, starts the song from the

On*1/Off

beginning as you change preset stations.

Interrupt

Turns on and off the sports alert function.

Off/On(One Time)/

On(Continue)*1

Audio

SportsFlash

Favorite

Selects your favorite sports teams.

Setup

Team

2 Live Sports Alert P. 288

SiriusXM® mode

SXM*

Interrupt

Causes the system to beep when the sports alert

On*1/Off

Beep

is notified.

Traffic & Weather Setup

Selects the region you want to receive the

information.

Multiple Channel Mix

Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off.

On/Off*1

Preset

 

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Bluetooth® mode

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a

paired phone.

Bluetooth

2 Phone Setup P. 418

iPod or USB mode

[Your selected media]

Turns the cover art display on and off.

On*1/Off

Other

Cover Art

Audio

Selects whether the list of selectable audio source

Audio Source Pop-Up

comes on when Audio is selected on the home

On/Off*1

screen.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio

Yes/No

settings group as default.

Sound

Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.

2 Adjusting the Sound P. 273

Home Screen Edit Order

Changes the HOME screen icon layout.

Menu Icon Position*2

Changes the position of the menu icons on the

Audio, Phone, and Info screen.

System Home

Configuration of

Changes the Instrument Panel screen icon

Instrument Panel

layout.

Tachometer Setting

Turns on and off the tachometer display.

On*1/Off

 

*1:Default Setting

*2:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

Features

 

Continued 367

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information

screen.

Display

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information

Settings

screen.

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/information

screen.

 

Features

Display

System

Background Color*2

Changes the background color of the audio/

information screen.

Models with 16 or 17-inch wheels

 

Blue/Amber/Red/ Violet/BlueGreen*1

Models with 18 or 20-inch wheels

 

Blue/Amber/Red*1/

Violet/BlueGreen

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen.

High/Low*1

Changes the sound volume.

Guidance Volume

Adjusts the guidance volume of the navigation

00~06*1~11

Sound/

system.

Beep

Text Message Volume

Changes the text/e-mail message reading

01~06*1~11

volume.

*1:Default Setting

*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

368

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Voice Recog. Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

01~06*1~11

Meter Volume – List

Changes the list reading volume.

01~06*1~11

Reading

Sound/

Meter Volume –

01~06*1~11

Beep

Changes the alphabetic reading volume.

Alphabetic Reading

Verbal Reminder*

Turns the verbal reminders on and off.

On*1/Off

Beep Volume

Changes the beep volume.

Off/1/2*1/3

One Press Voice

Changes the setting of the

(Talk) button operation when

On*1/Off

Operation

using the voice operation.

System

Voice Prompt

Turns the voice prompt on and off.

On*1/Off

Voice Recog. Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

01~06*1~11

Voice

Song by Voice

Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off.

On*1/Off

Recog. Song by Voice

Modifies a voice command for music stored in the USB flash

Phonetic Modification

drive or an iPod/iPhone.

2 Phonetic Modification P. 296

Phonebook Phonetic

Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.

Modification

2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 427

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets phonebook and call history data to be automatically

On/Off

imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

 

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 369

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Clock/

Clock

Wallpaper

Type*2/

Wallpaper

Clock

Type*3

Clock Adjustment

Auto Time Zone*

Clock

See Info on P. 360

Manual Time Zone

System

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Clock Format

Clock Display

Overlay Clock Location

Clock Reset

English (United

Others

Language

Change the display language.

States)*1/Français/

Español

*1:Default Setting

*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

*3:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Alerts you when manual control of the system is

Voice Command Tips*

disabled to prevent distraction while driving.

On*1/Off

Only voice commands are available.

Remember Last Screen*3

Selects whether the device remembers the last

On/Off*1

screen.

System Others

Turns on the audio system automatically and

Memory Refresh

restores the fragmentation of a memory when

On*1/Off

the ignition switch is LOCK 0*2.

Refresh Time Adjustment

Sets the time for Memory Refresh.

Change Skin

Changes the screen interface design.

Yes/No

Factory Data Reset

Resets all the settings to their factory default.

Yes/No

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 379

*1:Default Setting

*2:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*3:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 371

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Changes the length of time the climate control

Never/5 Seconds/10

Climate Screen Timeout

display stays on when you press the CLIMATE

Seconds*1/20

Others

button.

Seconds

System

Detail Information

Displays the details of the head unit and

operating system information.

Default

Cancels /Resets all customized items in the

Yes/No

System group as default.

TPMS Calibration*

Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS.

Cancel/Calibrate

Forward Collision Warning

Changes the distance at which CMBSTM alerts.

Long/Normal*1/Short

Distance

Causes the system to beep when the system

ACC Forward Vehicle

detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of

On/Off*1

Driver

Detect Beep

the ACC range*/ACC with Low Speed Follow

Vehicle

Assist

range*.

System

Lane Keeping Assist

Causes the system to beep when LKAS is

On/Off*1

Setup

Suspend Beep

suspended.

Road Departure Mitigation

Changes the setting for the road departure

Normal*1/Wide/

Setting

mitigation system.

Warning Only

Rev Match System*

Turns the Rev Match System feature on and off.

On*1/Off

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Meter

Vehicle

Setup

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F

Adjust Outside Temp.

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few

(U.S.)

Display

degrees.

-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C

(Canada)

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,

When Refueled/IGN

“Trip A” Reset Timing

average fuel economy A, average speed A, and

Off/Manually Reset*1

elapsed time A.

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,

When Refueled/IGN

“Trip B” Reset Timing

average fuel economy B, average speed B, and

Off/Manually Reset*1

elapsed time B.

Adjust Alarm Volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers,

High/Mid*1/Low

warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.

Shift Up Backlight*

Changes whether shift up backlight blinks when

On*1/Off

the tachometer reading approaches the red zone.

Shift Up Backlight*/Shift Up Alarm* P. 123
Shift Up Alarm*

Changes whether alarm sounds when the

On*1/Off

tachometer reading approaches the red zone.

Shift Up Backlight*/Shift Up Alarm* P. 123
Features

 

Fuel Efficiency Backlight*

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

On*1/Off

Turn By Turn Auto Display

Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes

On*1/Off

on during the route guidance.

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

Continued

373

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Used to select whether a pop-up alert comes on

New Message Notifications

the screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail

On*1/Off

message.

mph∙miles*1/

km/h∙km

Meter

Speed/Distance Units

Selects the trip computer units.

(U.S.)

Vehicle

mph∙miles/

Setup

km/h∙km*1

(Canada)

Tachometer

Selects whether the tachometer is displayed on

On*1/Off

the driver information interface.

Gear Position Display*

Turns the gear position display feature on and

On*1/Off

off.

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Remote Start System ON/

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.

On*1/Off

OFF*

Keyless

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the

Driver Door Only*1/

driver’s door handle.

All Doors

Vehicle Access

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you

Setup

*

Keyless Access Light Flash

On*1/Off

unlock/lock the doors.

Keyless Access Beep

Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/

On*1/Off

lock the doors.

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 375

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Interior Light Dimming

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay

15seconds/

30seconds*1/

Time

on after you close the doors.

60seconds

0seconds/

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights

15seconds*1/

stay on after you close the driver’s door.

30seconds/

60seconds

Lighting

Vehicle

Changes the timing for the headlights to come

Max/High/Mid*1/

Setup

Auto Light Sensitivity*

on.

Low/Min

Auto Interior Illumination

Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the

Max/High/Mid*1/

instrument panel when the headlight switch is in

Sensitivity

Low/Min

the AUTO position.

Auto Headlight ON With

Changes the settings for the wiper operation

when the headlights automatically come on while

On*1/Off

Wiper ON

the headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Used to change the setting for when the doors

With Vehicle

Auto Door Lock

Speed*1/Shift from

automatically lock.

P*2/Off

All Doors When

Driver’s Door

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors unlock

Opens*1/All Doors

When Shifted to

automatically.

Park*2/All Doors

When Ignition

Door/

Switched Off/Off

Vehicle Window

Key and Remote Unlock

Sets up the driver’s door or all the doors to unlock

Driver Door*1/All

Setup

Mode

on the first push of the remote.

Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

On*1/Off

LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

Security Relock Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock

90seconds/

and the security system to set after you unlock

60seconds/

the vehicle without opening any door.

30seconds*1

Walk Away Auto Lock*

Changes the settings for the auto lock function

On/Off*1

when you walk away from the vehicle.

*1:Default Setting

*2:Continuously variable transmission models

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 377

Customized Featuresu
Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Group

Used to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display

Maintenance Info.

when the maintenance service has been

Vehicle

performed.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Yes/No

Vehicle settings group as default.

 

Features

378

Customized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Defaulting All the Settings

 

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Others tab.
Select Factory Data Reset.

u A confirmation message appears on the screen.

Select Yes to reset the settings.
Select Yes again to reset the settings.
u A confirmation message appears on the

screen. Select OK.

u After selecting OK, the system will

reboot.

1Defaulting All the Settings

 

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink® because it becomes off line.

HondaLink® P. 305
Features

 

379

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.

Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.

Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.

 

1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

 

Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

Features

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path.

* Not available on all models
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink

Training HomeLink

 

I HomeLink Button Indicator

 

If it is necessary to erase a previously entered

learned code:

Press and hold the I and III HomeLink buttons for about 10 seconds, until the green indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1.
If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.

III HomeLink Button

The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515.

Features

Continued 381

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink
Programming a Button
Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 – 8 cm) from the HomeLink® button you want to program.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Is the HomeLink indicator (LED) slowly flashing orange?

1Training HomeLink

 

Reprogramming a Button

If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until

the HomeLink indicator begins to slowly flash

Features

 

YES

 

3a. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

 

Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a second. Does the device (garage door opener) work?

NO

 

3b. Canadian Garage Door Opener

 

A. Press and release the HomeLink button. Press, hold and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED)

change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing or continuously on

green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

orange. This should take about 20 seconds.

2. Release the HomeLink button and position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 – 3 inches (3 – 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program, then follow steps 3 – 6 under “programming a button.”

Erasing Button Memory

To erase programming from the buttons, press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons until the HomeLink indicator changes from orange to rapidly flashing green. This should take about 10 seconds. You should erase all

YES NO

 

Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
programming before selling the vehicle.

Operating

Training

 

Complete HomeLink LED is continuously on green.

 

Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
The remote-controlled device should operate.

Training Complete

 

HomeLink indicator rapidly flashes green.

 

5a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the “learn” button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).

 

5b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

 

To operate, simple press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device.

Questions

For questions or comments, visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink Hotline (North America only) at (800) 355-3515.

HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

382

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Models with color audio system

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons
Volume down

Microphone

 

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities. Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528 -7876.

Voice control tips

• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere

 

with the microphone.

• Press and release the button when you want to

Volume up

Phone Button

Talk Button

Selector Knob

Hang-up/Back Button

Pick-up Button

call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak

clearly and naturally after a beep.

• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,

the command may be misinterpreted.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.

Speed Dial P. 400
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.

Features

Continued 383

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an incoming call.

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.

(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.

(Phone) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.

Selector Knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .

 

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

Features

384

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
HFL Status Display

Battery Level Status

Signal Strength

Roam Status

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

HFL Mode

Call Name

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

1HFL Status Display

 

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

 

Features

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.

Speed Dial P. 400
385

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
HFL Menus

 

Features

 

The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY q or ON w to use HFL.

or

 

Phone

Speed Dial*1

Add New

 

Call History

Phonebook

(Existing entry list)

Phone Number

 

1HFL Menus

 

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Call History*1

Dialed Calls

Display the last 20 outgoing calls.

Display the last 20 incoming calls.

Received Calls

Display the last 20 missed calls.

Missed Calls

Display the paired phones’s phonebook.

Phonebook*1

 

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

386

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Dial*1

Enter a phone number to dial.

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

Redial*1

 

Phone Setup

Bluetooth Setup

Add New Device

Connect a Phone

Connect an Audio Device

Disconnect All Devices

Delete Device

Pass-key

 

Pair a phone to the system.

Connect a phone to the system.

Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the system.

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

Delete a previously paired phone.

Create a code for a paired phone.

Features

 

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued 387

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

 

Add New

Speed Dial*1

Call History

Phonebook

Phone Number

Existing entry list

Change Speed Dial

 

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Change a previously stored speed dial number.

Delete Speed Dial

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Store Voice Tag

Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Change Voice Tag

Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Delete Voice Tag

 

388

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you

Auto Transfer

enter the vehicle.

 

Ringtone

Mobile Phone

Fixed

Caller ID

Info

Name Priority

Number Priority

 

Select the ring tone stored in the connected cell phone.

Select the ring tone stored in HFL.

Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID.

Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the caller ID.

Features

 

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries,

System Clear

and security codes.

Continued 389

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Phone Setup
To pair a cell phone (No phone has

been paired to the system)

Press the button or the button.
Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.
Rotate to select Yes, then press . u The audio system will enter a waiting
mode for pairing.

Select HandsFreeLink form your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this
audio system, press and follow the prompts.

When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing .

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.

1Phone Setup

 

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is connected to HFL.
If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone can be used with HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

When pair a phone from this audio system: If your phone doesn’t appear on the audio/ information screen, select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.

390

To pair a cell phone (when a phone has

already been paired to the system)

Press the button or the button. u If a prompt appears asking to connect to
a phone, select No and proceed with step 2.

Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Add New Device, then press .
u The screen changes to device list.

 

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Features

Continued 391

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.

 

When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, select Phone Not Found? and search for

Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

 

392

To Change the currently paired phone
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .

 

Rotate to select Connect a Phone, then press .
u The screen changes to a device list.

 

Rotate to select a desired device name, then press .
u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.

 

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Features

Continued 393

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .

3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .

 

Rotate to select Pass-Key, then press
.

 

Input a new pairing code, then press .

394

To delete a paired phone

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Delete Device, then press .
u The screen changes to a device list.

Rotate to select a phone you want to delete, then press .
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Features

Continued 395

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Auto Transfer.
Rotate to select On or Off.

Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Ringtone, then press
.

Rotate to select Fixed or Mobile Phone, then press .

1Ring Tone

 

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

396

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Caller’s ID Information
You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming call.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Caller ID Info, then press .
Rotate to select a mode you want, then press .

1Caller’s ID Information

 

Name Priority: A caller’s name is displayed if it is stored in the phonebook.

Number Priority: A caller’s phone number is displayed.

 

Features

Continued 397

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To Clear the System
Pairing codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, all call history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select System Clear, then press .
Rotate to select Yes, then press .
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

A notification appears on the screen. Press
.

 

398

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.

 

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

 

When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile Other

Work

Voice

Pager

If a name has four or more numbers, … appears instead of category icons.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Features

 

Continued 399

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.

To store a speed dial number:

 

1Speed Dial

 

You can use the audio preset buttons during a call to store a speed dial number:

1. Press and hold the desired audio preset button

Features

 

ChangeChange SpeedSpeed DialDial

 

DeleteDelete SpeedSpeed DialDial

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Rotate to select Add New, then press
.

Rotate to select a place to choose a number from, then press .
From Call History:

u Select a number from the call history. From Phonebook:

u Select a number from the connected cell phone’s imported phonebook.

From Phone Number:

u Input the number manually.

When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press .
Using the button, follow the prompts to say the name for the speed dial entry.

during a call.

2. The contact information for the active call will be

stored for the corresponding speed dial.

When a voice tag is stored, you can press the button and call the number using voice commands.

400

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To edit a speed dial

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Change Speed Dial, then press .
Select a new speed dial number, then press

.

 

Features

Continued 401

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Change Speed Dial

 

Delete Speed Dial

Store Voice Tag

 

ChangeChange SpSpeedpeed DialDial

DeleteDelete SpeedSpeed DialDial

To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then press .
Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.

To change a voice tag
Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Change Voice Tag, then press .
Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial

 

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.

It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

402

 

Change Speed Dial Delete Speed Dial Store Voice Tag

To delete a voice tag
Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag, then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

 

To delete a speed dial number
Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.

Select an existing speed dial entry.
Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial, then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

 

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Features

Continued 403

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

 

1Making a Call

 

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen.

Press the button and follow the prompts.

The maximum range between your phone and vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

404

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using the imported

phonebook

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL.

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Phonebook, then press .
The phonebook is stored alphabetically. Rotate to select the initial, then press .
Rotate to select a name, then press .
Rotate to select a number, then press
.

u Dialing starts automatically.

 

To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .

3. Rotate to select a number, then press

.

4. Rotate to select , then press . u Dialing starts automatically.

 

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

 

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Limitations for Manual Operation P. 385
Speed Dial P. 400
1To make a call using a phone number

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Limitations for Manual Operation P. 385
Speed Dial P. 400
Features

 

Continued 405

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To make a call using redial

Press the button or the button.
Rotate to select Redial, then press . u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Call History, then press .

3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .

4. Rotate to select a number, then press

.

u Dialing starts automatically.

 

1To make a call using redial

 

Press and hold the button to redial the last number dialed in your phone’s call history.

1To make a call using the call history

The call history appears only when a phone is connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls.

406

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the button or the button.

2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press

.

3. Rotate to select a number, then press

.

u Dialing starts automatically.

 

1To make a call using a speed dial entry

 

On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the list can be directly selected by pressing the corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6).

Select Others to view another paired phone’s speed dial list.

When a voice tag is stored, press the button and call the number using voice commands.

Speed Dial P. 400
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by

voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts.

Features

 

Continued 407

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Receiving a Call
When there is an incoming call, an audible

 

HFL Mode

notification sounds and the Incoming Call screen appears.

Press the

button to answer the call.

Press the

button to decline or end the call.

 

Caller’s Name

1Receiving a Call

 

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current call.

Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information

screen instead of the and buttons. Rotate

to select the icon, then press .

408

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.

Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.

Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

To view the available options, press the button.
Rotate to select the option, then press
.

u The check box is checked when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

 

1Options During a Call

 

Dial Tones: Available on some phones.

Features

 

409

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Features

 

Models with Display Audio

 

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons

Buttons

3

4

ENTER Button

Microphone

Volume up

Volume down

Button

(Talk) Button

(Hang-up/Back) Button (Pick-up) Button

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:

U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528 -7876.
Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status setting must be On. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay, HFL is unavailable.

How to customize P. 350
Voice control tips

Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
Press the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
Up to five speed dial entries can be displayed among a total of 20 that can be entered.

Speed Dial P. 424
410

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone menu on the driver information interface, or to answer an incoming call.

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous command, or cancel a command.

(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal.

3 4 buttons: Press to select an item displayed on the phone menu in the driver information interface.

ENTER button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the phone menu in the driver information interface.

button: Select and press ENTER to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Phonebook on the phone menu in the driver information interface.

To go to the Phone Menu screen:

Press the button to switch the display to the phone screen.
Select MENU.
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Up to five previous calls can be displayed at a time among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

Features

 

Continued 411

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
HFL Status Display
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

 

1HFL Status Display

 

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

Battery Level Status

HFL Mode

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone is

connected to HFL.

Roaming Status

Features

 

Caller’s Name

Signal Strength

Caller’s Number

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.

Speed Dial P. 424
412

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus

 

The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY q or w*1 to use HFL.

Phone Settings screen
1. Press the button.

 

2. Select Settings.

3. Select Phone.

1HFL Menus

 

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving.

 

Phone

 

Features

Bluetooth Device List

(Existing entry list)

 

Connect

 

Connect

Connect

Disconnect

 

Delete

 

Connect a paired device to the system.

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

Delete a paired phone.

Add Bluetooth Device Pair a new phone to the system.

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued 413

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Priority Device

 

Settings

Priority On/Off Status

 

Audio

Phone

Enable the system to or disables it from automatically establishing a connection with

Bluetooth® device which has been assigned priority.
Select the priority device over another paired audio device(s).

Select the priority device over another paired phone(s).

Features

 

Edit Speed Dial

(Existing entry list)

 

New Entry

Edit

Delete

Manual Input

Import from Call History

Import from Phonebook

Edit a previously stored speed dial number.

Change a name.
Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Delete All

Delete all of the previously stored speed dial numbers.

Ring Tone

Select a fixed ring tone or the one from the connected cell phone.

Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

Automatic Phone Sync

Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.

HondaLink Assist

 

414

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Text/Email

Enable Text/Email

 

Select Account

New Message Notification

Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.

Select a text or e-mail message account.

Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail message.

Default

 

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone settings group as default.

 

Features

Continued 415

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Phone Menu screen
1. Press the button.

 

2. Select MENU.

 

Speed Dial

(Existing entry list)

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

Features

New Entry

 

Manual Input

 

Import from Call History

 

Import from Phonebook

 

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Edit Speed Dial

(Existing entry list)

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

New Entry

 

Manual Input

 

Import from Call History

 

Import from Phonebook

 

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

416

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

 

Phonebook

Redial

Dial

Call History

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Redial the last number dialed.

Enter a phone number to dial.

All

Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Display the last outgoing calls.

Dialed

Display the last incoming calls.

Received

Display the last missed calls.

Missed

 

Text/Email

(Existing message list)

Read/Stop

 

Reply

Dial

System reads received message aloud, or stop message from being read.

See the previous message.

See the next message.

Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.

Make a call to the sender.

Features

Select Account

Select a text or e-mail message account.

Continued 417

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Phone Setup
To pair a cell phone (when there is no

phone paired to the system)

Select Phone.
Select Yes.
Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.
Select HandsFreeLink from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this
audio system, select HandsFreeLink Not Found, Continue, and then select your phone when it appears on the list. If your phone does not appear, you can select Refresh to search again.

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.
u You can prioritize a Bluetooth® device at

the same time. Select Yes and then a device you want to prioritize.

1Phone Setup

 

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is paired to the system.
If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone can be used with HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay, pairing of additional Bluetooth-compatible devices is unavailable and Add Bluetooth Device is grayed out from the Bluetooth Device List screen.

418

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To change the currently paired phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2 Phone Settings screen P. 413

2. Select Bluetooth Device List.

3. Select a phone to connect.

u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.

4. Select Connect , Connect , or Connect .

To change the pairing code setting

Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi.
Select the Bluetooth tab.
Select Edit Pairing Code.
1To change the currently paired phone

 

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again.

To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device from the Bluetooth Device List screen.

To change the Bluetooth® connection priority device setting, select Priority Device Settings from the Bluetooth Device List screen.

1To change the pairing code setting

The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting.

To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one.

For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random.

Features

 

6. Select Random or Fixed.

Continued 419

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To delete a paired phone

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 413

Select Bluetooth Device List.
Select a phone you want to delete.
Select Delete.
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
420

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To Set Up Text/E-mail Message Options
To turn on or off the text/e-mail

message function

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 413

Select the Text/Email tab, then Enable Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select On or Off.
To turn on or off the text/e-mail message notice

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 413

Select the Text/Email tab, then New Message Notification.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select On or Off.
1To Set Up Text/E-mail Message Options

 

To use the text/e-mail message function, it may be necessary to set up on your phone.

Some text/e-mail message features may not be available depending on a cell phone.

1To turn on or off the text/e-mail message notice

On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message.

Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.

Features

 

Continued 421

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

 

2 Phone Settings screen P. 413

2. Select Ring Tone.

3. Select Fixed or Mobile Phone.

 

1Ring Tone

 

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Mobile Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

Features

422

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When Automatic Phone Sync is set to

On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system.

Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 413

Select Automatic Phone Sync.
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

 

When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

Work

Voice

Pager

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Features

 

Select On or Off.
Continued 423

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.

To store a speed dial number:

 

1. Go to the Phone Menu screen.

2 Phone Menu screen P. 416

Select Speed Dial.
Select New Entry.
From Import from Call History:

u Select a number from the call history. From Manual Input:

u Input the number manually.

From Import from Phonebook:

u Select a number from the connected cell phone’s imported phonebook.

When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Select Yes or No.
5. Select Record, or use the button and follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial

 

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag name.

424

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To add a voice tag to a stored speed

dial number

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 413

Select Edit Speed Dial.
Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Record.

Select Record, or use the button and follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial

 

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.

It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name.

For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

 

Features

To delete a voice tag

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 413

Select Edit Speed Dial.
Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Clear.

A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
Continued 425

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To edit a speed dial

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 413

Select Edit Speed Dial.
Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
Select a setting you want.
To delete a speed dial
Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 413

Select Edit Speed Dial.
Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Delete.

A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
426

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.

To add a new voice tag
Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification.
Select the phone you want to add phonetic modification to.

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

 

You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.

 

Features

Continued 427

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Select New Voice Tag.
Select a contact name you want to add to. u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.

Select Modify.
Using Record or the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select OK.

428

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To modify a voice tag
Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification.
Select the phone you want to modify phonetic modification.
Select a contact name you want to modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Modify.
Using Record or the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select OK.

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

 

You can only modify or delete contact names for the currently connected phone.

Features

 

Continued 429

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To delete a modified voice tag
Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select System.
Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification.
Select the phone you want to delete phonetic modification.
Select a contact name you want to delete. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Select Delete.
u The selected contact name has been selected.

Select OK.

430

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To delete all modified voice tags

1. Press the button.

2. Select Settings.

3. Select System.

Select the Voice Recog. tab.
Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification.
Select the phone you want to delete phonetic modification.
u The contact name list appears.

7. Select Delete All.

You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select Yes.
Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

 

1Making a Call

 

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from most screens.

Press the button and say the voice tag name.

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple CarPlay.

Features

 

Continued 431

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To make a call using the imported

phonebook

Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 416

Select Phonebook.
Select a name.
u You can also search by letter. Select Search.

u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering a name, if multiple numbers exist select a number.

Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using a phone number
Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 416

Select Dial.
Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering numbers.

Select .
u Dialing starts automatically.

 

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

 

You can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Speed Dial P. 424
1To make a call using a phone number

You can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands.

Speed Dial P. 424
432

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using redial
Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 416

Select Redial.
u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using the Call History Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Received, and Missed.
Go to the Phone Menu screen.

Phone Menu screen P. 416
Select Call History.
Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed.
Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
Go to the Phone Menu screen.
2 Phone Menu screen P. 416

Select Speed Dial.
Select a number.

u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the Call History

 

The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed, received, or missed calls.

(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.)

1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag.

Speed Dial P. 424
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen.

Press the button and follow the prompts.

Features

 

Continued 433

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Receiving a Call
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming call screen appears.

 

Press the

button to answer the call.

Press the

button to decline or end the

call.

 

Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.

Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

Mute Icon

The available options are shown on the lower

half of the screen.

 

Select the option.

u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

1Receiving a Call

 

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current call.

Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information

screen instead of the and buttons.

1Options During a Call

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

You can select the icons on the audio/information screen.

434

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
HFL can display newly received text or e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new

text or e-mail message.

Select Read to listen to the message.
u The text or e-mail message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading out the message.

To discontinue the message read-out, select Stop.
1Receiving a Text/E-mail Message

 

The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.

The system can only receive messages that are sent as text (SMS) messages. Messages sent using data services will not be displayed in the list.

With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 most recent text and e-mail messages.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text/ e-mail message feature. Only use the text/e-mail message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.

When you receive a text or e-mail message for the first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to turn the New Message Notification setting to On.

To turn on or off the text/e-mail message notice P. 421
Features

 

Continued 435

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Selecting a Text/E-mail Message Account
If a paired phone has text or e-mail message accounts, you can select one of them to be active and receive notifications.

Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 413

Select the Text/Email tab, then Select Account.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Text Messages or an e-mail message account you want.

1Selecting a Text/E-mail Message Account

 

You can also select an e-mail message account from the folder list screen or the message list screen.

Select

Account

You can only receive notifications from one text or e-

mail message account at a time.

436

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Displaying Messages
Message List

■ Displaying text messages

1. Go to the Phone Menu screen.

2 Phone Menu screen P. 416

2. Select Text/Email.

u Select account if necessary.

3. Select a message.

u The text message is displayed. The

system automatically starts reading the

message aloud.

Text Message

 

1Displaying Messages

 

The icon appears next to an unread message.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is also deleted in the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phone’s outbox.

To see the previous or next message, select (previous) or (next) on the message screen.

 

Features

Continued 437

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Folder List

■ Displaying e-mail messages

1. Go to the Phone Menu screen.

2 Phone Menu screen P. 416

2. Select Text/Email.

u Select Select Account if necessary.

3. Select a folder.

4. Select a message.

u The e-mail message is displayed. The

system automatically starts reading the

Message List

message aloud.

Features

E-mail

Message

438

 

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Read or Stop reading a message

Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.

2 Displaying Messages P. 437

Select Stop to stop reading.
Select Read again to start reading the message from the beginning.

Reply to a message

Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.

2 Displaying Messages P. 437

Select Reply.
Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select Send to send the message.
u Message sent appears on the screen when the reply message was successfully sent.

1Reply to a message

 

The available fixed reply messages are as follows:

Talk to you later, I’m driving.
I’m on my way.
I’m running late.
OK
Yes
No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

Only certain phones receive and send messages when paired and connected. For a list of compatible phones:

U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.
Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
Features

 

Continued 439

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Making a call to a sender

1. Go to the text message screen.

2. Select Dial.

 

Features

440

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

In Case of Emergency
Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected.

 

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/ TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.

Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.

1In Case of Emergency

 

Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.

You cannot use this emergency service when:

You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage areas.
There is a problem with the connecting devices, such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle.

1Automatic collision notification

If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

Features

 

*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not be sent to the operator.

Continued 441

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To enable notification
Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 413

Select the Phone tab, then HondaLink Assist.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Select On or Off.

1To enable notification

 

Setting options:

On: Notification is available.
Off: Disable the feature.
Features

442

Driving

This chapter discusses driving and refueling.

Before Driving 444

Towing a Trailer 450

When Driving

Starting the Engine 451, 454

Precautions While Driving 459

Continuously Variable Transmission* 460

Shifting 461, 463, 468

ECON Mode* 472

 

2.0 L engine models

Drive Mode Switch 473

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic

Stability Control (ESC), System 475

Agile Handling Assist 478

 

2.0 L engine models

Limited Slip Differential (LSD) 479

LaneWatchTM*…………………………….

480

Radar Sensor ……………………………..

548

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Braking

(TPMS)*………………………………..

482

Brake System ……………………………..

549

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ………..

556

Required Federal Explanation* ………

486

Brake Assist System …………………….

557

Honda Sensing®…………………………..

488

Parking Your Vehicle……………………

558

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

Multi-View Rear Camera………………

560

(CMBSTM) …………………………………

491

Refueling

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Fuel Information …………………………

562

Speed Follow* ………………………….

501

How to Refuel ……………………………

Emissions

564

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*…….

518

Fuel Economy and CO2

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ..

533

Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)

541

CO2 Emissions…………………………..

566

System …………………………………

Turbo Engine Vehicle …………………..

567

Front Sensor Camera …………………..

546

* Not available on all models 443

Before Driving

Driving

 

Driving Preparation

 

Check the following items before you start driving.

Exterior Checks
Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.

u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.

u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components.

Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.

Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 609

Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.
1Exterior Checks

 

NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.

Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.

Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.

444

Before DrivinguDriving Preparation
Interior Checks
Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.

Maximum Load Limit P. 447
Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.

Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving.

If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
Securely close and lock all doors and the hatch.
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 156
Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the front head restraint*, too.

Adjusting the Seats P. 193
Adjusting the Front Head Restraints Positions P. 196
Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.

Adjusting the Mirrors P. 190
Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 189
1Interior Checks

 

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 445

Before DrivinguDriving Preparation
Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats.
u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.

Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
Fastening a Seat Belt P. 44
Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.

2 Indicators P. 82

 

Driving

446

Before DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Maximum Load Limit

 

1.5 L engine models

 

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).

2.0 L engine models

 

The maximum load for your vehicle is 680 lbs (308 kg).

See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.

 

Label Example

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

1Maximum Load Limit

 

WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue load.

Specifications P. 684
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.

Specifications P. 684
Driving

 

Continued 447

Before DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Driving

 

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit –

Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
448

Before DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

 

Load Limits Example

Example1

Max Load

Passenger Weight

Cargo Weight

850 lbs

150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs

550 lbs

(385 kg)

(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

(249 kg)

Example2

Max Load

Passenger Weight

Cargo Weight

850 lbs

150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs

100 lbs

(385 kg)

(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

(45 kg)

1Maximum Load Limit

 

Towing a Trailer:

See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a trailer.

Towing a Trailer P. 450
Driving

 

449

Towing a Trailer

Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your warranties.

Towing Your Vehicle

 

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.

Emergency Towing P. 679

Driving

450

When Driving

Models without smart entry system

 

Starting the Engine

 

1Starting the Engine

 

Electric Parking Brake Switch

 

Brake Pedal

 

Clutch Pedal

Brake Pedal

Make sure the parking brake is applied. u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) comes on for 15 seconds when you pull up the electric parking brake switch.

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Check that the transmission is in P, then depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle in N, it is safer to start it in P.

Manual transmission models

Check that the shift lever is in N. Then depress the brake pedal with your right foot, and the clutch pedal with your left foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed to start the engine.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.

Driving

 

Continued 451

When DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving

 

All models

 

Turn the ignition switch to START e without depressing the accelerator pedal.
Starting to Drive
Continuously variable transmission models

Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the shift lever in D. Select R when reversing.
With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off.

2 Parking Brake P. 549

1Starting the Engine

 

Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 10 seconds.

If the engine does not start right away, wait for at least 30 seconds before trying again.
If the engine starts, but then immediately stops, wait at least 30 seconds before repeating step 3 while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine starts.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

Immobilizer System P. 163
1Starting to Drive

You can also release the parking brake by pressing the electric parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it with the electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with the accelerator pedal.

452

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Put the transmission into D, S, or L* when facing uphill, or R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Manual transmission models

 

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill, or R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

1Hill start assist system

 

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.

Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is switched off.

 

Driving

* Not available on all models 453

When DrivinguStarting the Engine Models with smart entry system

Starting the Engine

 

1Starting the Engine

 

Driving

 

Electric Parking Brake Switch

 

Brake Pedal

 

Clutch Pedal

Make sure the parking brake is applied. u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) comes on for 15 seconds when you pull up the electric parking brake switch.

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Check that the transmission is in P, then depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle in N, it is safer to start it in P.

Manual transmission models

Check that the shift lever is in N. Then depress the brake pedal with your right foot, and the clutch pedal with your left foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed to start the engine.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft.

If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

Immobilizer System P. 163
Brake Pedal

454

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

All models

 

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal.
Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Put the transmission into P.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Manual transmission models

If the shift lever is in N, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
If the shift lever is in any gear other than N, depress the clutch pedal, then press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1Starting the Engine

 

Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry remote is weak.

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 660
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is subjected to strong radio waves.

Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine.

If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before starting the engine again.

Driving

 

Continued 455

When DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving

 

456

Remote Engine Start*
You can remotely start the engine using the smart entry remote.

To start the engine

Press the

button, then press and hold

the

button.

Go within the range,

Some exterior lights flash once.

and try again.

LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.

The exterior lights flash six The exterior lights will not

times if the engine runs flash if the engine runs

successfully. unsuccessfully.

When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling and/or the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed simultaneously.

To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the

button, then press and hold the button.

 

u The exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was transmitted successfully.

* Not available on all models

1Remote Engine Start*

 

WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly enclosed areas.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Never use the remote engine starter with the vehicle parked in a garage or other areas with limited ventilation.

The remote engine start may violate local laws. Before using the remote engine start, check your local laws.

If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced. The range may be less when the vehicle is running. This distance may vary by external electrical interference.

The engine may not start by the remote engine start if:

You have disabled a remote engine start setting using the audio/information screen.
The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
The transmission is in a position other than (P.
The hood is open, or any door or the hatch is unlocked.
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

To stop the engine

Go within the range,

and try again.

The exterior lights will not flash when the remote is out of the smart entry system range. The engine will not stop.

Press and hold the

button for one The exterior lights flash once if the engine stops successfully.

second.

1Remote Engine Start*

 

You have already used the remote twice to start the engine.
Another registered smart entry remote is in the vehicle.
There is any antenna failure.
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
The engine oil pressure is low.
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
The security system alarm is not set.
While the engine is running, the vehicle will automatically activate climate control with a preset temperature of 72°F (22°C). When it is warm outside:

The climate control system is activated in
recirculation mode.

When it is cold outside:

The defroster is activated at a moderately warm temperature.
The rear defogger and door mirror heaters* are activated.
The seat heaters are activated*.
Front Seat Heaters* P. 215
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 457

When DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving

 

Starting to Drive
Continuously variable transmission models

When the engine was started using the button on the smart entry remote

 

Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button
simultaneously.

When the engine was started in any case

Put the shift lever in D. Select R when reversing.
With the parking brake is applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off.

2 Parking Brake P. 549

Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Continuously variable transmission models

Put the transmission into D, S, or L* when facing uphill, or R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Manual transmission models

 

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill, or R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

1Starting to Drive

 

When the engine was started using the button on the smart entry remote

The engine stops when the shift lever is moved out of (P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.

You can also release the parking brake by pressing the electric parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it with the electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with the accelerator pedal.

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.

Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is switched off.

* Not available on all models
When DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Precautions While Driving

In Rain

Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.

Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Precautions While Driving

 

Continuously variable transmission models

NOTICE

Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.

NOTICE

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored.

Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.

If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q*1 while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as not to damage the engine or powertrain.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). You should also follow this when the brake pads are replaced.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models 459

When DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission*
Continuously Variable Transmission*

 

Creeping
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.

Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower ratio, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

 

1Precautions While Driving

 

NOTICE

2.0 L engine models

The following can damage the under spoiler:

Parking the vehicle by a parking block
Parallel parking along the road shoulder
Driving towards the bottom of a hill
Driving up or down to a different surface level (such as a road shoulder)
Driving on a rutted or bumpy road
Driving on a road with potholes
Driving

* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Continuously variable transmission models without paddle shifters

 

Shifting

 

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

Shift lever positions

Park

Used when parking or starting the

engine

Reverse

Used when reversing

Neutral

Transmission is not locked

Drive

Used for normal driving

Drive (S)

Used:

● For better acceleration

● To increase engine braking

Release Button

● When going up or down hills

Low

● Used to further increase engine braking

● Used when going up or down hills

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Shift lever positions

 

You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1 and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.

The vehicle may move very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold.

Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.

Driving

 

Continued 461

When DrivinguShifting
Driving

 

Shift Lever Operation

Shift Lever Position

Indicator

Tachometer’s

red zone

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

Press the shift lever release button and shift.

1Shift Lever Operation

 

NOTICE

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed.

Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.

Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving, blinking transmission system indicator indicates a transmission problem.

Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the

brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release

button is held down.

Depress the brake pedal first.

462

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Continuously variable transmission models with paddle shifters

Shifting

 

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

Shift lever positions
Park

Used when parking or starting the

engine

Reverse

Used when reversing

Neutral

Transmission is not locked

Drive

Used:

● For normal driving

● When temporarily driving in the

7-speed manual shift mode

Drive (S)

Used:

● For better acceleration

Release Button

● To increase engine braking

● When going up or down hills

● When driving in the 7-speed

manual shift mode

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Shift lever positions

 

You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1 and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.

The vehicle may move very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold.

Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.

Driving

 

Continued 463

When DrivinguShifting
Driving

 

Shift Lever Operation

Shift Lever Position

Indicator

M (7-Speed Manual

Tachometer’s

red zone

Shift Mode) Indicator/

Shift Indicator

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

Press the shift lever release button and shift.

1Shift Lever Operation

 

NOTICE

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed.

Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.

Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving, blinking transmission system indicator indicates a transmission problem.

Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the

brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release

button is held down.

Depress the brake pedal first.

464

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without releasing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful when engine braking is needed.

When the shift lever is in D:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the number is displayed in the shift indicator.

The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off.

You can cancel this mode by pulling the + paddle shifter for a few seconds.

The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed temporarily before making a turn.

When the shift lever is in S:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down, the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.

If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.

You can only pull away in 1st speed.

When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from S to D. When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift indicator will turn off.

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode

 

In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter under the following conditions:

Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher speed position.

Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower speed position.

When the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s red zone, the transmission shifts up automatically.

When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts down automatically.

Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back to the normal D driving mode.

Driving

 

Continued 465

When DrivinguShifting
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

(- Paddle Shifter (+ Paddle Shifter

(Shift down) (Shift up)

 

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

 

Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed change.

To change continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next speed.

The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its allowable shifting range.

Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.

Driving

Downshifting when pulling Upshifting when pulling

the (- paddle shifter the (+ paddle shifter

(Changes to lower speed (Changes to higher speed

number) number)

466

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Shift Up/Down Indicators*
Come on while the vehicle is in the 7-speed manual shift mode to indicate when a speed position change is appropriate to maintain the most fuel efficient driving style.

 

The shift up indicator: Comes on when

upshifting is recommended.

The shift down indicator: Comes on when

downshifting is recommended.

1Shift Up/Down Indicators*

 

WARNING
The shift indicator is only a guide to help you achieve better fuel economy.

Never refer to the Shift Indicators when road and traffic conditions are unsuitable or when it may distract you.

This indicator will not prompt you to downshift to increase engine braking. It is up to you to downshift to increase engine braking when driving downhill.

Always shift down at the appropriate vehicle speed.

Ambient meter color may change if you do not change gears when a shift indicator illuminates. This can result in a change in fuel economy.

Road and traffic conditions may require you to shift at times other than those indicated.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models 467

When DrivinguShifting Manual transmission models

Driving

 

Shifting

Shift Lever Operation

Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then slowly release the pedal.

Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into R, or shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not “grind.”

When you are not shifting, do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your clutch to wear out faster.

 

1Shift Lever Operation

 

NOTICE

Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.

Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the transmission.

NOTICE

Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not go into the tachometer’s red zone. Should this occur, it can severely damage your engine.

2.0 L engine models

There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel cold.

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometer’s red zone. When this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

468

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

2.0 L engine models

 

Rev Match System
Adjusts the engine’s RPM to match the optimal speed of the gear that is about to be engaged.

2 Drive Mode Switch P. 473

Limitations
The rev match system will not activate under the following conditions:

You are shifting into a lower gear, but the system has determined that the engine will over rev.
You are shifting into 1st gear from a higher gear.
Engine RPM is low and you are shifting into a lower gear in sequential order.
The system has determined that the engine will be at idling speed after you have shifted into a higher gear.
The clutch pedal is not fully depressed.
The rev match system may deactivate if the clutch is kept engaged for a extended period of time.

1Rev Match System

 

You can turn off the rev match system using the audio/information screen.

Customized Features P. 350
If you depress the accelerator pedal while changing gears, the system will give priority to inputs from the accelerator pedal.

If the message below appears, there may be a problem with the system. The rev match system may not operate, but you can perform regular gear shifting. Have the system checked by a dealer.

Driving

 

Continued 469

When DrivinguShifting
Shift Up/Down Indicators*
Come on to inform you that upshifting or

 

downshifting is necessary to prevent the

engine from over revving or stalling.

The shift up indicator: Comes on when

upshifting is recommended.

The shift down indicator: Comes on when

downshifting is recommended.

 

1Shift Up/Down Indicators*

 

This indicator will not prompt you to downshift to increase engine braking. It is up to you to downshift to increase engine braking when driving downhill.

Always shift down at the appropriate vehicle speed.

The shift down indicator does not come on when downshifting from (2 to (1.

Ambient meter color may change if you do not change gears when a shift indicator illuminates. This can result in a change in fuel economy.

Road and traffic conditions may require you to shift at times other than those indicated.

Driving

* Not available on all models
Reverse Lockout
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally shifting into R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain speed.

If you cannot shift to R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:

Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift

lever all the way to the left, and shift to R.

2. If you still cannot shift into R, apply the parking brake, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY q or LOCK 0*1.

Depress the clutch pedal and shift into R.
Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start the engine.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you

have to go through this procedure repeatedly.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

 

Driving

471

When DrivinguECON Mode*
ECON Mode*

 

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.

The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, transmission, climate control system.

 

Driving

1ECON Mode*

 

While in the ECON mode, the climate control system has greater temperature fluctuations.

* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode Switch

2.0 L engine models

 

Drive Mode Switch

 

Constantly controls your vehicle’s engine, transmission, EPS, dampers, brakes and VSA® according to the mode you select.

You can choose between three modes, +R mode, SPORT mode and COMFORT mode by moving the drive mode switch forward or back.

The current mode is displayed on the driver information interface, and each mode will appear differently.

 

+R Mode

1Drive Mode Switch

 

SPORT mode is selected every time you set the power mode to ON.

The mode may not be able to be changed under some driving conditions. If mode change is necessary, reduce speed or cornering speed.

This message will also appear if you try to change modes when there is a vehicle system failure.

 

SPORT

Mode

COMFORT

Mode

Drive Mode Switch

Driving

Continued 473

When DrivinguDrive Mode Switch
Driving

 

Category

COMFORT

SPORT

+R

Steering

Light feedback for easy

Increased feedback for sport

Increased feedback for high

driving.

driving.

performance driving.

Chassis

Suspension

Minimized to provide a

Increased to provide improved

Maximized to provide responsive

handling for high performance

Control

Damping

soft ride.

handling for sport driving.

driving.

VSA® and TCS

Balanced calibration for VSA® and Traction control in all

Track oriented control allowing

environments.

increased freedom for the driver.

Acceleration

Relaxed

Aggressive

Aggressive

Powertrain

Feeling

Control

Rev Match

Seamless

Seamless

Responsive

System

 

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System P. 475
Rev Match System P. 469
474

When DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

VSA® Operation

VSA® System Indicator

When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic brake system. You will also see the indicator blink.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire Pressure/TPMS* and Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) may come on after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 475

When DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® On and Off

VSA® OFF

Indicator

 

Driving

This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially disable VSA® functionality/ features, press and hold it until you hear a beep.

Your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but traction control function will be less effective.

To restore VSA® functionality/features, press the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a beep.

 

VSA® is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.

When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.

476

When DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
2.0 L engine models

 

When the drive mode is in +R mode
To completely disable VSA®, the VSA® must be in +R mode. Press and hold the VSA® OFF button until you hear a single beep, then later two more beeps.

 

u This message appears on the driver information interface.

To resume VSA® full function, press the VSA® OFF button until a single beep is heard.

If VSA® OFF mode is selected, and drive mode is changed to a mode other than +R, VSA® full function will resume, and the VSA® OFF indicator will goes off.

1When the drive mode is in +R mode

 

In OFF mode, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA® traction and stability enhancement.

When the VSA® system is off, the traction control system is also off.

We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control system switched off.

When you completely disable VSA®, you cannot use Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) or the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS). If either feature is in use when you completely disable VSA®, the feature in use will automatically be canceled.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System and Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) do not function while VSA® is completely disabled.

Driving

 

477

When DrivinguAgile Handling Assist
Agile Handling Assist

 

Lightly brakes the front wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during cornering.

 

Driving

1Agile Handling Assist

 

The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, the agile handling assist does not activate.

You may hear a sound coming from the engine compartment while the agile handling assist is activated. This is normal.

478

uuWhen DrivinguLimited Slip Differential (LSD)

2.0 L engine models

 

Limited Slip Differential (LSD)

Limited Slip Differential (LSD)

LSD (limited slip differential) is a type of differential that delivers extra torque to the wheel or the wheels with the most traction to minimize wheel slip and maintain control of the vehicle.

1Limited Slip Differential (LSD)

 

NOTICE

Make sure both front tires of your vehicle are of the same brand and specified size, and have equal wear. Otherwise, the LSD may not function properly.

 

Driving

479

When DrivinguLaneWatchTM*
LaneWatchTM*

 

LaneWatch is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while driving.

 

1LaneWatchTM*

 

WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death.

Driving

 

The system activates when you:
Move the turn signal Press the LaneWatch

lever to the passenger button.

side.

2

The passenger side view display appears on the audio/information screen.

Do not rely only on LaneWatch while driving.

Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes.

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in

The system deactivates when you press the LaneWatch button again.

Camera

Audio/Information Screen

a collision.

The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather, lighting (including headlights and low sun angle), ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.

The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display of traffic to the side and rear under the following conditions:

Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered, changing the height of the vehicle.
Your tires are over or under inflated.
Your tires or wheels are of varied size or construction.
* Not available on all models
When DrivinguLaneWatchTM*
Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.

Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when you operate the turn signal lever.
Display Time after Turn Signal Off: Changes the length of time the LaneWatch display stays on after you pull the turn signal lever back.
Reference Line: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch monitor.
Display: Allows for display adjustments of items, such as brightness, contrast and black level. This setting is part of the System setup group.
1LaneWatchTM*

 

The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique lens makes objects on the screen look slightly different from what they are.

LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift lever is in (R.

For proper LaneWatch operation:

• The camera is located in the passenger side door

mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera

lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,

2 Customized Features P. 350

Reference Lines

3

2

1

Three lines that appear on the screen can give an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on the screen are from your vehicle, respectively. If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates that it is close to your vehicle whereas an object near line 3 is farther away.

moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.

• Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers

of any kind.

• Do not touch the camera lens.

1Reference Lines

The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.

The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and 3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines on the screen may seem to appear closer than the actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more heavily loaded.

Consult a dealer if:

• The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is

severely impacted, resulting in changing the

camera angle.

• The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models

481

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*
Driving

 

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*

 

Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are significantly under-inflated.

This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS

indicator to come on and a message to appear

Indicator

on the driver information interface.

 

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*

 

The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed.

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.

Tire pressure checked and inflated in:

Warm weather can become under-inflated in colder weather.
Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation.

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire.

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 609
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on at all when:

You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the steering wheel.
You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
Tire chains are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on under the following conditions:

A compact spare tire* is used.
There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires, such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at calibration.
Tire chains are used.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*

TPMS Calibration
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:

Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
Rotate the tires.
Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:

Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 609

Make sure:

The vehicle is at a complete stop.
Manual transmission models

The shift lever is in N.
Continuously variable transmission models

The shift lever is in P.
All models

 

The ignition switch is in ON w*1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1TPMS Calibration

 

TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire* is installed.

The calibration process requires approximately 30 minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30-65 mph (48-105 km/h).

During this period, if the ignition is turned on and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may notice the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the calibration process is not yet complete.

If the tire chains are installed, remove them before calibrating the TPMS.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even when the properly inflated specified regular tires are installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

We recommend that the tires be replaced with the same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a dealer for details.

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire Pressure/TPMS and Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) may come on after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 483

 

Driving

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*
Models with color audio system

 

You can calibrate the system from the

customized features on the driver information

interface.

 

1. Press the

button and press /

 

button to select (Vehicle Settings),

then press the ENTER button.

u TPMS Calibration appears on the

display.

Press the ENTER button.
u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select Cancel or Calibrate.

Press the 3 / 4 button and select Calibrate, then press the ENTER button. u Calibration Started screen appears,
then the display returns to the customization menu screen.

If the Calibration Failed to Start message appears, repeat steps 2-3.
The calibration process finishes automatically.
484

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*

Models with Display Audio

 

You can calibrate the system from the

customized feature on the audio/information

screen.

Set the power mode to ON.
Press the button.
Select Settings.
Select Vehicle.
Select TPMS Calibration.
Select Cancel or Calibrate.
u When the calibration is complete, the

display returns to the customization

menu screen.

If the Calibration Failed To Start. message appears, repeat step 6.
The calibration process finishes automatically.
Driving

 

485

 

Driving

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation*
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation*

 

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

 

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation*

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Driving

 

487

Honda Sensing®

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: a radar sensor located in the lower bumper and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

Honda Sensing® has following functions.

The functions which do not require switch operations to activate
• Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) 2 P. 491

• Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System 2 P. 541

The functions which require switch operations to activate
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow* 2 P. 501
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* 2 P. 518
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 533

Driving

* Not available on all models
Operation Switches for the ACC with Low Speed Follow*/ ACC*/LKAS
Honda Sensing®u
CANCEL

 

Button

Interval Button

LKAS

Button

MAIN

Button

RES/+

Button

−/SET

Button

MAIN Button
Press to activate standby mode for ACC with

Low Speed Follow*/ACC* and LKAS. Or press

to cancel these systems.

LKAS Button
Press to activate or cancel the LKAS.

RES/+/−/SET Button
Press RES/+ to resume the ACC with Low

Speed Follow*/ACC* or increase the vehicle

speed.

Press −/SET to set the ACC with Low Speed

Follow*/ACC* or decrease the vehicle speed.

Interval Button
Press the (interval) button to change the

 

ACC with Low Speed Follow*/ACC* following-

interval.

CANCEL Button
Press to cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow*/

ACC*.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 489

Honda Sensing®u
Driving

 

Driver Information Interface Content
You can see the current state of ACC with

 

Low Speed Follow*/ACC* and LKAS.

aIndicates that ACC with Low Speed

Follow*/ACC* and LKAS are ready to be

activated.

bIndicates that LKAS is activated and

whether or not traffic lane lines are

detected.

cIndicates whether or not a vehicle is

detected ahead.

dShows the set vehicle speed.

eShows the set vehicle interval.

* Not available on all models
Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

Manual transmission models

When the CMBSTM activates, the engine may stop automatically.

Start the engine by normal operation if the engine stops.

Starting the Engine P. 451, 454
Important Safety Reminder

The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collisions nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.

The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 496
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 546
For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page.

Radar Sensor P. 548
Driving

 

Continued 491

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

How the system works

When to use

The camera is located

behind the rearview

mirror.

The radar sensor is in the lower bumper next to the fog light*.

The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.

The CMBSTM activates when:

The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.
Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system determines there is a chance of a collision with:
Vehicles detected in front of you that are stationary, oncoming, or traveling in your same direction.
A pedestrian who is detected in front of you.
Your vehicle speed is above 62 mph (100 km/h), and the system determines there is a chance of a collision with a vehicle detected in front of you traveling in your same direction.
1How the system works

 

When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle stops or a potential collision is not determined.

2.0 L engine models

CMBSTM does not function while VSA® is completely disabled.

* Not available on all models
Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
When the system activates

The system provides visual and audible alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided.

Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.)
Visual Alerts

Audible Alert

1When the system activates

 

The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians.

However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions.

Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list.

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 496
Beep

You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the system’s earliest collision alert will come on through driver information interface or audio/information screen setting options.

List of customizable options P. 137, 359
Driving

 

Continued 493

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

Collision Alert Stages
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage.

CMBSTM

Distance between vehicles

The radar sensor

Audible & Visual WARNINGS

Braking

detects a vehicle

When in Long, visual and audible alerts

Normal

Vehicle

There is a risk of a

come on at a longer distance from a

Long Short

Ahead

Stage one

collision with the vehicle

vehicle ahead than in Normal setting, and

ahead of you.

in Short, at a shorter distance than in

Your Vehicle

Normal.

The risk of a collision has

Your

Vehicle

Stage two

Vehicle

Ahead

increased, time to

Lightly applied

respond is reduced.

The CMBSTM determines

Visual and audible alerts.

Your

Vehicle

Stage three

Vehicle

Ahead

that a collision is

Forcefully applied

unavoidable.

 

494

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
CMBSTM On and Off
Press and hold the button until the beeper sounds to switch the system on or off.

 

When the CMBSTM is off:

• The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument panel comes on.

• A message on the driver information interface reminds you that the system is off.

The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain conditions:

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 496
When the CMBSTM is activated, it will continue to operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially depressed. However, it will be canceled if the accelerator pedal is deeply depressed.

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire Pressure/TPMS* and Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) indicator may come on after reconnecting the battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 495

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 546

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between objects and the background.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
1CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations

 

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

496

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Vehicle conditions
Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
When tire chains are installed.
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
The camera temperature gets too high.
Driving with the parking brake applied.
When the radar sensor in the lower bumper gets dirty.
Detection limitations
A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you at high speed.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small vehicle.
When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of you is significantly large.
An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.
Driving

 

Continued 497

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only

 

When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by side.
Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or they are running.
When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).
Automatic shutoff
The CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the CMBSTM indicator comes and stays on when:

The temperature inside the system is high.
You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.

Once the conditions that caused the CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.

498

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
With Little Chance of a Collision
The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:

When Passing
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.

At an intersection
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.

 

1With Little Chance of a Collision

 

Do not paint, or apply any coverings or paint to radar sensor area. This can impact CMBSTM operation.

 

Driving

Continued 499

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

On a curve
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you.

 

Through a low bridge at high speed
You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.

Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside objects (such as a traffic sign and guard rail) on a curve or, when parking, stationary vehicles and walls.

 

500

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*

 

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

When ACC with Low Speed Follow slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle’s brake lights will illuminate.

 

When to use

The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

The radar sensor is in the lower bumper. Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly impacted.

Vehicle speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow: A vehicle is detected ahead within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
No vehicle is detected within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at the speed of 25 mph (40km/h) or above.

Shift position for ACC with Low Speed Follow: In (D or (S.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow *

 

WARNING
Improper use of ACC with Low Speed Follow can lead to a crash.

Use ACC with Low Speed Follow only when driving on expressways or freeways and in good weather.

WARNING
ACC with Low Speed Follow has limited braking capability and may not stop your vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle that quickly stops in front of you.

Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal if the conditions require.

Important Reminder

As with any system, there are limits to ACC with Low Speed Follow. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.

For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page.

Radar Sensor P. 548
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 501

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Driving

 

How to activate the system

How to use

ACC (green) is on in the instrument panel.

ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to use.

■ Press the MAIN button on the steering wheel.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow *

 

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 546
The radar sensor for ACC with Low Speed Follow is shared with the collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM).

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 491
When the MAIN button is pressed, both ACC with Low Speed Follow and the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are either turned on or off.

ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 508
When not using ACC with Low Speed Follow: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).

* Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*

To Set the Vehicle Speed

−/SET Button

On when ACC with Low

Speed Follow begins

Press and release

When driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with Low Speed Follow begins.

When driving slower than about 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the button fixes the set speed to 25 mph (40 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If your vehicle is stationary and a vehicle is detected ahead, your vehicle speed can be set, even with the brake pedal depressed.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow *

 

Do not use ACC with Low Speed Follow under the following conditions:

On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in continuous stop and go traffic.
On roads with sharp turns.
On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC with Low Speed Follow will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed.
On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.
You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen between mph and km/h.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire Pressure/TPMS* and Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) may come on after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 503

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Set Vehicle Interval

 

Set Vehicle Speed

 

When ACC with Low Speed Follow starts

operating, the vehicle icon, interval bars and

set speed appear on the driver information

interface.

When you use ACC with Low Speed Follow,

Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric

Power Steering system) is activated.

By enabling the steering system to

automatically compensate for natural steering

pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for

you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

Driving

504

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*

When in Operation
There is a vehicle ahead
ACC with Low Speed Follow monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with Low Speed Follow range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with Low Speed Follow system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.

To Set or Change Following-interval P. 512

ACC with Low Speed Follow Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down.

 

1When in Operation

 

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, the beeper sounds, a message appears on the driver information interface.

Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate interval from the vehicle ahead.

Beep

Driving

 

A vehicle icon appears on the

driver information interface

Continued 505

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
There is no vehicle ahead
1When in Operation

 

vehicle icon with dotted-line contour appears on the driver information interface

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal.

If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.

Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with Low Speed Follow may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances:

The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with Low Speed Follow detecting range. Change the ACC

Driving

 

When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.

ACC with Low Speed Follow stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following-interval while a vehicle ahead is within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.

There are times when the vehicle speed will decrease when the accelerator pedal is lightly applied.

Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
Limitations

You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC with Low Speed Follow. Additionally, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 508
506

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*

A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and
slows to a stop

Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The Stopped message appears on the driver information interface.

 

When the vehicle ahead of you starts again, the vehicle icon on the driver information interface blinks. If you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, or depress the accelerator pedal, ACC with Low Speed Follow operates again within the prior set speed.

If no vehicle is ahead of you before you resume driving, depress the accelerator pedal and ACC with Low Speed Follow will operate again within the prior set speed.

 

1A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and slows to a stop

 

WARNING
Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped while the ACC with Low Speed Follow system is operating can result in the vehicle moving without operator control.

A vehicle that moves without operator control can cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.

Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

 

Driving

Continued 507

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Driving

 

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC with Low Speed Follow indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 546

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).

Vehicle conditions
The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The camera temperature gets too high.
The parking brake is applied.
When the lower bumper next to the fog light* is dirty.
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
When tire chains are installed.
1ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations

 

If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by pressing the MAIN button and take your vehicle to a dealer.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

* Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*

Detection limitations
A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high speed.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.
When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.

1ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations

 

If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:

The vehicle impacted a bump, curb, chock, embankment, etc.
You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
Your vehicle has a frontal collision.

Driving

The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you is significantly large.
An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
Continued 509

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
When driving through a narrow iron bridge.

When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.

Radar detects upper section

Panel truck, tanker

of an empty carrier truck.

truck, etc.

Driving

When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
510

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET button on the steering wheel.

 

To increase speed

To decrease speed

Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you press and hold the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

 

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or the audio/information screen between mph and km/h.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
When you depress the accelerator pedal and then push and release the –/SET button, the current speed of the vehicle is set.

Driving

 

Continued 511

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Driving

 

To Set or Change Following-interval
Press the (interval) button to change the

 

ACC with Low Speed Follow following-

interval.

Each time you press the button, the following-

interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected

ahead of you) setting cycles through extra

long, long, middle, and short following-

intervals.

Interval Button

Determine the most appropriate following-

interval setting based on your specific driving

conditions. Be sure to adhere to any

following-interval requirements set by local

regulation.

512

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*

The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.

 

Following-interval

When the Set Speed is:

50 mph (80 km/h)

65 mph (104 km/h)

81.0 feet

103.3 feet

Short

24.7 meters

31.5 meters

1.1 sec

1.1 sec

112.2 feet

142.4 feet

Middle

34.2 meters

43.4 meters

1.5 sec

1.5 sec

153.5 feet

199.4 feet

Long

46.8 meters

60.8 meters

2.1 sec

2.1 sec

Extra

208.3 feet

273.6 feet

63.5 meters

83.4 meters

Long

2.9 sec

2.9 sec

When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has stopped, the interval between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with Low Speed Follow interval setting.

Driving

 

Continued 513

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
To Cancel
CANCEL

To cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow, do any

Button

of the following:

Press the CANCEL button.

Press the MAIN button.

u ACC with Low Speed Follow indicator

goes off.

• Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is

moving forward.

MAIN Button

 

1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC with Low Speed Follow, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button.

The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC with Low Speed Follow has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.

Driving

514

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*

Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC with Low Speed Follow to automatically cancel:

Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
When the radar sensor in the lower bumper next to the fog light* gets dirty.
The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
Abrupt steering wheel movement.
When the ABS, VSA® or CMBSTM is activated.
When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
When you manually apply the parking brake.
When the detected vehicle within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range is too close to your vehicle.
The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty.
When the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
When passing through an enclosed space, such as tunnel.
The ACC with Low Speed Follow automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the following causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied.

The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.
The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.
The engine is turned off.
1Automatic cancellation

 

Even though ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC with Low Speed Follow to cancel improves, then press the –/SET button.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 515

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control

 

ACC with

Low Speed

Cruise

Follow ON

Control ON

 

When to use

Press and hold the (interval) button for one second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise.

 

To switch back to ACC with Low Speed Follow, press and hold the button again for one second. ACC Mode Selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds.

 

Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle ahead of you.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or the audio/information screen between mph and km/h.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
Driving

Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.

To Set the Vehicle Speed
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed.

The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated.

By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

516

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep the RES/+ or –/SET button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:

Press the CANCEL button.
Press the MAIN button.
Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed:

After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

You cannot set or resume in the following situations:

When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h).
When the MAIN button is turned off.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically.

Driving

 

517

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Driving

 

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

 

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

 

When to use

The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

The radar sensor is in the lower bumper next to the fog light. Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly impacted.

Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

 

WARNING
Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.

Use ACC only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

WARNING
ACC has limited braking capability. When your vehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35 km/h), ACC will automatically cancel and no longer will apply your vehicle’s brakes.

Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal when conditions require.

Important Reminder

As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the

brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a

safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.

For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page.

Radar Sensor P. 548
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 546
* Not available on all models
Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
How to activate the system

How to use

ACC (green) is on in the instrument panel.

ACC is ready to use.

■ Press the MAIN button on the steering wheel.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

 

The radar sensor for ACC is shared with the collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM).

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 491
ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 523
When the engine speed slows down, try to downshift. You can maintain the set speed if you change gear within five seconds.

When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).

When the MAIN button is pressed, both ACC and the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are either turned on or off.

Do not use ACC under the following conditions:

On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in continuous stop and go traffic.
On roads with sharp turns.
On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed.
On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 519

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
To Set the Vehicle Speed

−/SET Button

On when ACC begins

Press and release

Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed.

 

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

 

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen between mph and km/h.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF and Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) may come on after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2.0 L engine models

Driving

Set Vehicle Interval

 

Set Vehicle Speed

The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC begins.

u When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon, interval bars and set speed appear on the driver information interface.

When you use ACC, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated.

By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

When you completely disable VSA®, you cannot use ACC.

* Not available on all models
Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
When in Operation
There is a vehicle ahead
ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.

To Set or Change Following-interval P. 527

ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down.

 

1When in Operation

 

If the vehicle detected ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle is detected cutting in front of you, the beeper sounds, and a message appears on the driver information interface.

Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate interval from the vehicle ahead.

Beep

Driving

 

A vehicle icon appears on the

driver information interface

Continued 521

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
There is no vehicle ahead
1When in Operation

 

vehicle icon with dotted-line contour appears on the driver information interface

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal.

If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.

Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances:

The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle

Driving

 

When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC range.

ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes the set speed.

There are times when the vehicle speed will decrease when the accelerator pedal is lightly applied.

Detect Beep setting.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
Limitations

You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC. Additionally, ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 523
522

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
ACC Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.

2 Front Sensor Camera P. 546

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).

Vehicle conditions
The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The camera temperature gets too high.
The parking brake is applied.
When the lower bumper next to the fog light is dirty.
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
When tire chains are installed.
1ACC Conditions and Limitations

 

If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by pressing the MAIN button and take your vehicle to a dealer.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

Driving

 

Continued 523

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Detection limitations
A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high speed.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.
When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.

1ACC Conditions and Limitations

 

If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:

The vehicle impacted a bump, curb, chock, embankment, etc.
You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
Your vehicle has a frontal collision.
Driving

The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you is significantly large.
An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
524

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

When driving through a narrow iron bridge.

When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.

Radar detects upper section

Panel truck, tanker

of an empty carrier truck.

truck, etc.

Driving

When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.
Continued 525

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Driving

 

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET button on the steering wheel.

 

To increase speed

To decrease speed

Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep pressing the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

 

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or the audio/information screen between mph and km/h.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
When you depress the accelerator pedal and then push and release the –/SET button, the current speed of the vehicle is set.

526

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

To Set or Change Following-interval
Press the (interval) button to change the

 

ACC following-interval.

Each time you press the button, the following-

interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected

ahead of you) setting cycles through extra

long, long, middle, and short following-

intervals.

Interval Button

Determine the most appropriate following-

interval setting based on your specific driving

conditions. Be sure to adhere to any

following-interval requirements set by local

 

regulation.

Driving

Continued 527

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Driving

 

The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.

 

Following-interval

When the Set Speed is:

50 mph (80 km/h)

65 mph (104 km/h)

83.3 feet

100.4 feet

Short

25.4 meters

30.6 meters

1.1 sec

1.1 sec

109.6 feet

137.4 feet

Middle

33.4 meters

41.9 meters

1.5 sec

1.5 sec

153.8 feet

199.8 feet

Long

46.9 meters

60.9 meters

2.1 sec

2.1 sec

Extra

213.5 feet

282.7 feet

65.1 meters

86.2 meters

Long

2.9 sec

2.9 sec

528

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
To Cancel

CANCEL Button

MAIN Button

To cancel ACC, do any of the following:

Press the CANCEL button.
Press the MAIN button. u ACC indicator goes off.
Depress the brake pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or more.
1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button when driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.

 

Driving

Continued 529

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Driving

 

Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to automatically cancel:

Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
When the radar sensor in the lower bumper next to the fog light gets dirty.
The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
Abrupt steering wheel movement.
When the ABS, VSA® or CMBSTM is activated.
When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
When you manually apply the parking brake.
When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle.
The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty.
When the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
When passing through an enclosed space, such as tunnel.
Ignoring shift down indication shown in the tachometer display will cancel the ACC after about 10 seconds.
The engine speed goes into the tachometer’s red zone.
The engine speed goes to below 1,000 rpm.
You shift into neutral temporarily when shifting into a higher or lower gear.
1Automatic cancellation

 

Even though ACC has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves, then press the –/SET button.

2.0 L engine models

When you completely disable VSA® while ACC is activated, ACC will automatically be canceled.

530

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control

 

ACC ON

Cruise

Control ON

 

When to use
Press and hold the (interval) button for one second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise.

 

To switch back to ACC, press and hold the button again for one second. ACC Mode Selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds.

 

Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle ahead of you.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or the audio/information screen between mph and km/h.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.

To Set the Vehicle Speed
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed.

The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated.

By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

Driving

 

Continued 531

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Driving

 

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep the RES/+ or –/SET button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.
To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:

Press the CANCEL button.
Press the MAIN button.
Depress the brake pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or more. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed:

After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

You cannot set or resume in the following situations:

When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h).
When the MAIN button is turned off.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control canceled automatically.

532

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Steering input assist

The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines.

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

Important Safety Reminders

The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a substitute for your vehicle control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.

2 Driver Information Interface Warning and

Front Sensor Camera
Monitors the lane lines

Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

Information Messages P. 104

Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.

The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition.

It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.

The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 538
Driving

 

When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off.

If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 546
Continued 533

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Lane Keep Support Function
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger.

 

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

The LKAS may not function as designed while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves.

When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the system will recover automatically.

Driving

Lane Departure Warning Function
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as a warning display.

 

Warning Area

Warning Area

534

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

When the System can be Used
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.

The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
The turn signals are off.
The brake pedal is not depressed.
The wipers are not in continuous operation.
How to activate the system
1When the System can be Used

 

If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2.0 L engine models

When you completely disable VSA®, you cannot use LKAS.

MAIN Button

 

LKAS Button

Press the MAIN button.
u The LKAS is on in the driver information

interface.

 

The system is ready to use.

Driving

Press the LKAS button.
u Lane outlines appear on the driver

information interface.

The system is activated.

Continued 535

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving

 

Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving.
u The dotted outer lines change to solid ones once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.

 

To Cancel
To cancel the LKAS:

 

Press the MAIN or LKAS button.

The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

MAIN Button LKAS Button

1To Cancel

 

Models with ACC with Low Speed Follow

Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC with Low Speed Follow on and off.

Models with ACC

Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off.

2.0 L engine models

If you completely disable VSA® while LKAS is activated, LKAS will automatically be canceled.

536

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

When the LKAS is suspended, the lane lines on the driver information interface change to contour lines, and the beeper sounds (if activated).

 

The system operation is suspended if
you:

Set the wipers to continuous operation. u Turning the wipers off or setting it to LO
resumes the LKAS.

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

 

Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the wipers operate continuously.
u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop or operate intermittently.

All models

 

1The system operation is suspended if you:

 

You can change the setting for the LKAS.

LKAS suspended beep ON and OFF can be selected.

Customized Features P. 350
Decrease the vehicle speed to 40 mph (64 km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to 45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.

Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting

the lane lines again once you release the

brake pedal.

The LKAS may automatically be suspended when:
• The system fails to detect lane lines.

• The steering wheel is quickly turned.

• You fail to steer the vehicle.

• Driving through a sharp curve.

• Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h). Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.

Driving

 

Continued 537

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving

 

The LKAS may automatically be canceled when:
• The camera temperature gets extremely high or low.

• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty.

• The ABS or VSA® system engages.

A beeper will sound if the LKAS is automatically canceled.

LKAS Conditions and Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
538

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings.

Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks

The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk).
The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.

Very wide or narrow traffic lane

The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
Driving

 

Continued 539

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Driving

 

When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines).
Driving on roads with double lines.
Lane void of lines at junction

 

Vehicle conditions
Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
The camera temperature gets too high.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
540

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

 

Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether.

How the System Works
The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings (in white or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to detected lane markings without a turn signal activated, the system, in addition to a visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help you remain within the detected lane.

 

Customized Features P. 134, 350
As a visual alert, the Lane Departure message appears on the driver information interface.

If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the roadway, it may apply braking.

u Braking is applied only when the lane

markings are solid continuous lines.

The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid

crossing over detected lane markings.

If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you.

1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

 

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has limitations.

Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.

The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM system may not detect all lane markings or lane or roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Sensor Camera P. 546
The RDM system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 544
There are times when you may not notice RDM functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.

1How the System Works

2.0 L engine models

The RDM system does not function while VSA® is completely disabled.

Driving

 

Continued 541

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
How the System Activates
The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the following conditions are met:

The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
The turn signals are off.
The brake pedal is not depressed.
The wipers are not in continuous operation.
The vehicle is not accelerating or braking, and the steering wheel is not being turned.
The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating, braking or steering.

1How the System Activates

 

The RDM system may automatically shut off and the indicator comes and stays on.

Indicators P. 82
RDM system function can be impacted when the vehicle is:

Not driven within a traffic lane.
Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of a lane.
Driven in a narrow lane.
Driving

542

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
RDM On and Off
Press the RDM button to turn the system on and off.

 

u The indicator in the button comes on and the message appears on the driver information interface when the system is on.

Indicator RDM Button

1RDM On and Off

 

When you have selected Warning Only from the customized options using the driver information interface or the audio/information screen, the system does not operate the steering wheel and braking.

Customized Features P. 134, 350
The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire Pressure/TPMS* and Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) may come on after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

 

Driving

* Not available on all models Continued 543

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
Driving

 

RDM Conditions and Limitations
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
Reflections on the interior of the windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel.
544

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System

Roadway conditions
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings.
The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk).
The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines).
Driving on roads with double lines.
Vehicle conditions
Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
The camera temperature gets too high.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
When tire chains are installed.
Driving

 

545

Honda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera
Front Sensor Camera

 

The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC*, ACC with Low Speed Follow*, CMBSTM and auto high-beam, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its functions.

Camera Location and Handling Tips
1Front Sensor Camera

 

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally.

Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield

Driving

 

Front Sensor

 

Camera

This camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing.

Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

within the camera’s field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly.

* Not available on all models
Honda Sensing®uFront Sensor Camera
1Front Sensor Camera

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears:

Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed towards the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot

Operate: Clean Front Windshield message

appears:

• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the

 

windshield. If the message does not disappear after

you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a

while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

547

Honda Sensing®uRadar Sensor
Driving

 

Radar Sensor

 

The radar sensor is at the lower part of the front bumper.

 

Radar

Sensor

1Radar Sensor

 

Avoid strong impacts to the radar sensor cover.

For the CMBSTM to work properly:

Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a mild detergent.
Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover.
If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by using the safety support switch and take your vehicle to a dealer.

CMBSTM On and Off P. 495
If the vehicle is involved in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:

Your vehicle is involved in a frontal collision
Your vehicle drives through deep water or is submerged in deep water
Your vehicle strongly strikes a bump, curb, chock, or embankment that could jar the radar sensor
548

Braking

Brake System

Parking Brake

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.

1Parking Brake

 

You may hear the electric parking brake system motor operating from the rear wheel area when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.

Electric Parking

 

Brake Switch

 

Electric Parking

Brake Switch

To apply
The electric parking brake can be applied any time the vehicle has battery, no matter which position the ignition switch*1 is in.

Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently and securely.

u The indicator in the switch comes on.

u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) comes on.

To release
The vehicle must be ON w*1 in order to release the electric parking brake.

Depress the brake pedal.
Press the electric parking brake switch. u The indicator in the switch goes off. u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) goes off.

Manually releasing the parking brake using the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and smoothly when facing down hill on steep hills.

The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric parking brake system operation when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.

You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the battery goes dead.

If the Battery Is Dead P. 662
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch while driving, the brakes on all four wheels are applied by the VSA® system until the vehicle come to a stop. The electric parking brake then applies, and the switch should be released.

Driving

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued 549

BrakinguBrake System
■ To release automatically

1Parking Brake

 

Use the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake when you are starting the vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.

Manual transmission models

 

Depress the accelerator pedal while releasing the clutch pedal releases the parking brake.

Continuously variable transmission models

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) goes off.

Driving

Accelerator Pedal

Clutch Pedal

Manual transmission models

Gently depress the accelerator pedal and

release the clutch pedal.

u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) goes off.

 

In the following situations, the parking brake automatically operates.

When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.
When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while your vehicle is stopped and automatic brake hold is applied.
When the engine is turned off while automatic brake hold is applied.
When there is a problem with the Automatic Brake Hold System while automatic brake hold is applied.
Models with ACC with Low Speed Follow

When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.
When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with Low Speed Follow.
When the engine is turned off while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.
Manual transmission models

When there is a problem with the electric parking brake switch, after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1.
If the parking brake cannot be released automatically, release it manually.

Accelerator Pedal

550

BrakinguBrake System
The parking brake automatically releases as you depress the accelerator pedal when:

You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
The engine is running.
Continuously variable transmission models

 

The transmission is not in P or N.
Manual transmission models

 

• The transmission is not in N.

1Parking Brake

 

When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator pedal may need to be pressed farther to automatically release the electric parking brake.

The parking brake cannot be released automatically while the following indicators are on:

Malfunction indicator lamp
Transmission system indicator*
The parking brake may not be released automatically while the following indicators are on:

Parking brake and brake system indicator (red)
VSA® system indicator
ABS indicator
Supplemental restraint system indicator
Manual transmission models

The clutch pedal is fully depressed before gently depress the accelerator pedal and release the clutch pedal.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 551

BrakinguBrake System
Driving

 

Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist helps to reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.

Brake Assist System P. 557
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 556
2.0 L engine models

 

Brake squeal
To satisfy the performance under a wide range of driving conditions, a high-performance braking system is equipped on your vehicle. You may hear the brake squeal under certain conditions, such as vehicle speed, deceleration, humidity, and so on. This is not a malfunction.

1Foot Brake

 

Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.

If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc.

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear/speed position. With manual transmission use a lower gear for greater engine braking.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

552

BrakinguBrake System
Automatic Brake Hold

Continuously variable transmission models

Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights and in heavy traffic.

 

1Automatic Brake Hold

 

WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system on steep hills or slippery roads may still allow the vehicle to move if you remove your foot from the brake pedal.

Turning on the system
Comes

On

Automatic Brake Hold Button

■ Activating the system

■ Canceling the system

On

On

Comes

Goes

On

Off

Brake Pedal

U.S.

Accelerator Pedal

Comes

On

Canada

If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Never activate the automatic brake hold system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from moving when stopped on a steep hill or slippery roads.

 

Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the engine. Press the automatic brake hold button.

The automatic brake hold system indicator comes on. The system is turned on.
Depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop. The shift lever must not be in (P or (R.

The automatic brake hold indicator comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10 minutes.
Release the brake pedal after the automatic brake hold indicator comes on.
Depress the accelerator pedal while the shift lever is in a position other than (P or (N. The system is canceled and the vehicle starts to move.

The automatic brake hold indicator goes off. The system continues to be on.
Continuously variable transmission models

WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to park the vehicle may result in the vehicle unexpectedly moving.

If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.

Never leave the vehicle when braking is temporarily kept by automatic brake hold and always park the vehicle by putting the transmission in (P and applying the parking brake.

Driving

Continued 553

BrakinguBrake System
Manual transmission models

 

Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until you shift into one of the gears other than N and:

Release the clutch pedal on a level road or when facing downhill.
Release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal when facing uphill. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights and in heavy traffic.
Turning on the system
■ Activating the system ■ Canceling the system

 

Driving

 

Comes

On

Automatic Brake

Hold Button

Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the engine. Press the automatic brake hold button.

The automatic brake hold system indicator comes on. The system is turned on.
On

Comes

On

Brake Pedal

U.S.

Comes

On

Canada

Depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop.

The automatic brake hold indicator comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10 minutes.
Release the brake pedal after the automatic brake hold indicator comes on.
Clutch Pedal

On

Goes

Off

Accelerator Pedal

Shift into one of the

gears other than (N and:

Release the clutch pedal on a level road or when facing downhill.
Release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal when facing uphill.
The system is canceled

and the vehicle starts to

move.

The automatic brake hold indicator goes off. The system continues to be on.
554

BrakinguBrake System
The system automatically cancels when:
• You engage the parking brake.

Continuously variable transmission models

 

You depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to P or R.
The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when:
• Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.

• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

• The engine is turned off.

• There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.

Manual transmission models

 

The engine stalls.
Turning off the automatic brake hold system
1Automatic Brake Hold

 

While the system is activated, you can turn off the engine or park the vehicle through the same procedure as you normally do.

When Stopped P. 558
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated, the automatic brake hold turns off once the engine is off.

Manual transmission models

The system turns off if the engine stalls while automatic brake hold is active or the system is on.

 

1Turning off the automatic brake hold system

Automatic Brake

 

Hold Button

Goes

Off

While the system is on, press the automatic brake hold button again.

u The automatic brake hold system indicator goes off.

If you want to turn off automatic brake hold while the system is in operation, press the automatic brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed.

Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold system before using an automated car wash.

You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves while the automatic brake hold system is in operation.

Driving

555

BrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Driving

 

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

ABS

Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you can.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as “stomp and steer.”

ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on:

Wet or snow covered roads.
Roads paved with stone.
Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

 

NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of the wrong size or type.

If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system.

While normal braking will not be affected, there is a possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to skidding and loss of steering control.

In the following cases, your vehicle may need more distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:

You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces, such as gravel or snow.
The tires are equipped with tire chains.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:

Motor sounds coming from the engine compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started and while the vehicle accelerates.
Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates.

These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern.

556

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Brake Assist System

 

Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

 

Driving

557

Parking Your Vehicle

Driving

 

When Stopped

 

Depress the brake pedal firmly.
With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly, but fully.
Continuously variable transmission models

 

Change the shift position to P.
Manual transmission models

 

Move the shift lever to R or 1.
All models

 

Turn off the engine.
u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off in about 15 seconds.

1Parking Your Vehicle

 

Continuously variable transmission models

WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.

A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift lever position indicator.

Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber.

Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

1When Stopped

NOTICE

Continuously variable transmission models

The following can damage the transmission:

Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously.
Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by depressing the accelerator pedal.
Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle stops completely.
558

Parking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped
Always confirm the electric parking brake is set, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

1When Stopped

 

In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from moving. If you do not take either precaution, the vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

 

Driving

559

Multi-View Rear Camera

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

 

The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.

The display automatically changes to the rear view when the transmission is put into

.
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

Wide View Mode

Guidelines

Approx. 39 inches

(1 m)

Approx. 20 inches

Normal View Mode

(50 cm)

Driving

Bumper

Approx. 39 inches (1 m)

Top Down View Mode

Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)

Camera

560

 

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

 

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.

Models with Display Audio

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings.

Customized Features P. 350
Fixed Guideline

On: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R.

Off: Guidelines do not appear.

Dynamic Guideline

On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction.

Off: Guidelines do not move.

Multi-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display.

Models with color audio system

 

Press the selector knob to switch the angle.

Models with Display Audio

 

Touch the appropriate icon to switch the angle.

: Wide view

: Normal view

: Top down view

 

All models

 

If the last used viewing mode was Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next time you put the transmission into R.
If Top down view was last used before you turned off the engine, Wide View mode is selected next time you turn the ignition switch to ON w*1 and put the transmission into R.
If Top down view was last used more than 10 seconds after you shift from R, Wide View mode is selected the next time you put the transmission into R.
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

 

Models with color audio system

You can change the Camera Guideline settings.

Customized Features P. 343
Camera Guideline

On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R.

Off: Guidelines do not appear.

Driving

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

561

Refueling

Driving

 

Fuel Information

Fuel recommendation

Models without 18 or 20 inch wheels

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.

Models with 18 or 20 inch wheels

Unleaded premium gasoline, pump octane number 91 or higher

Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance.

Use of a gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to engine damage. The use of regular unleaded gasoline can cause metallic knocking noises in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance.

Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

1Fuel Information

 

NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

562

uuRefuelinguFuel Information

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

Fuel tank capacity: 12.39 US gal (46.9 L)

Driving

563

RefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving

 

How to Refuel

 

Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel fill cap. You can insert the filler nozzle directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler nozzle.

Stop your vehicle with the service station

Press

pump on the left side of the vehicle in the

rear.

2. Turn off the engine.

Unlock the driver’s door using the master
door lock switch or lock tab.

u The fuel fill door on the outer side of the vehicle will unlock.

Press the area indicated by the arrow to release the fuel fill door. You will hear a click.

Press

1How to Refuel

 

WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon fuel for other uses) or other non-service station devices can damage the area in and around the filler opening.

Use the lock tab or the master door lock switch to unlock the fuel fill door.

The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the driver’s door.

The fuel fill door and its latching mechanism can be permanently damaged if the fuel fill door is forced closed when the driver’s door is locked.

564

RefuelinguHow to Refuel
Place the end of the filler nozzle on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the filler nozzle goes down along with the filler pipe.

u Keep the filler nozzle level.

u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click off automatically.

u If you do not fill up the tank to full, always add a minimum of 1.3 US gal (5.0 L) of fuel.

u After filling, wait about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle.

Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1How to Refuel

 

If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.

If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the specified minimum amount of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container P. 682
Driving

 

565

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions

Driving

 

Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions

 

Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the driver information interface.

Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 582

Maintain the specified tire pressure.
Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside adds weight and increases wind resistance.
1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions

 

Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

Miles driven

Gallons of

Miles per

fuel

Gallon

100

Liters of

Kilometers

L per 100 km

fuel

driven

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test.

For more information on how this test is performed, please visit https://www.nrcan.gc.ca and search for “fuel consumption testing” in the search field at the top of the page.

566

Turbo Engine Vehicle

Handling Precautions

 

The turbocharger is a high-precision device to obtain greater horsepower by delivering a large volume of compressed air into the engine using a turbine driven by the engine’s exhaust gas pressure.

When the engine is cold just after starting, avoid revving the engine or sudden acceleration.
Always replace the engine oil and engine oil filter according to the Maintenance MinderTM. The turbine rotates at very high speeds over 100,000 rpm and its temperature reaches over 1,292°F (700°C). It is lubricated and cooled by engine oil. If you fail to replace the engine oil and filter at the scheduled distance or interval, deteriorated engine oil may cause failure such as sticking and abnormal noise of the turbine bearing.
1Turbo Engine Vehicle

 

The scheduled maintenance intervals for replacing the filter is indicated on the driver information interface. Follow the information of when to replace them.

Maintenance MinderTM P. 573
The temperature gauge pointer is at the H mark when you restart the engine after driving under high load conditions such as at high speed or in hilly terrain. This is normal. The gauge goes down after you idle or drive the vehicle for about one minute.

 

Driving

567

568

Maintenance

This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance

Engine Coolant …………………………..

589

Tire Service Life…………………………..

614

Inspection and Maintenance …………

570

Transmission Fluid……………………….

591

Tire and Wheel Replacement ………..

615

Safety When Performing Maintenance ….

571

Brake/Clutch* Fluid ……………………..

592

Tire Rotation………………………………

616

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance

Refilling Window Washer Fluid………

593

Winter Tires ……………………………….

617

Service …………………………………….

572

Replacing Light Bulbs …………………..

594

Cold Weather Driving ………………….

619

Maintenance MinderTM …………………

573

Checking and Maintaining Wiper

Battery………………………………………..

620

Maintenance Under the Hood

Blades ……………………………………

604

Remote Transmitter Care

Maintenance Items Under the Hood ….

579

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Replacing the Button Battery ………..

622

Opening the Hood ………………………

581

Checking Tires ……………………………

609

Climate Control System Maintenance ..

624

Recommended Engine Oil …………….

582

Tire and Loading Information Label …..

610

Cleaning

Oil Check …………………………………..

583

Tire Labeling ………………………………

610

Interior Care ………………………………

625

Adding Engine Oil……………………….

585

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)……

612

Exterior Care………………………………

628

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter…..

586

Wear Indicators…………………………..

614

Accessories and Modifications ……..

631

* Not available on all models 569

Before Performing Maintenance

Maintenance

 

Inspection and Maintenance

 

For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)

Types of Inspection and Maintenance
Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.

Periodic inspections
Check the brake/clutch* fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch* Fluid P. 592

Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 609

Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
Replacing Light Bulbs P. 594
Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 604
1Inspection and Maintenance

 

U.S. models

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are “certified” to EPA standards.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the driver information interface.

Maintenance Service Items P. 576
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.

Authorized Manuals P. 695
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.

* Not available on all models
Before Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance

 

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task.

Maintenance Safety
To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.

To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
Vehicle Safety
The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.

Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.

Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts.

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

 

WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner’s manual.

WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner’s manual.

Maintenance

 

571

Before Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

 

The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

 

1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

 

NOTICE

Do not press the engine cover* forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models
Maintenance MinderTM

Select the Maintenance Minder to see maintenance items that are due soon and to see the percentage of life remaining in the engine oil.

When the engine oil life is less than 15%, a Maintenance Minder message will appear every time you turn the ignition switch to ON w*1, reminding you to bring your vehicle to a dealer for service.

 

Maintenance

573

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance

 

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

 

Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Certain maintenance items due soon, along with the estimated remaining oil life, appear on the driver information interface.

You can view them on the Maintenance Minder screen at any time.

Turn the ignition switch to ON w*1.
Press the (Display/Information) button several times until is displayed.
Press ENTER button to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. The engine oil life appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items due soon.

Engine Oil Life

(Display/Information) Button

ENTER Button

Main Item

Sub Item

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

 

Based on the engine operating conditions and oil age, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.

Displayed Engine Oil

Calculated Engine Oil

Life (%)

Life (%)

100

100 to 91

90

90 to 81

80

80 to 71

70

70 to 61

60

60 to 51

50

50 to 41

40

40 to 31

30

30 to 21

20

20 to 16

15

15 to 11

10

10 to 6

5

5 to 1

0

0

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the driver information interface.

Maintenance Service Items P. 576
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

574

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface

Maintenance Message

Oil Life Display

Explanation

Information

When you select the Maintenance

Normal

Minder screen, it displays codes for

maintenance items due at the next

engine oil change, along with the

percentage of engine oil life remaining.

Maintenance Due Soon

The engine oil life indicator starts to

The engine oil is approaching the

appear along with other due-soon

end of its service life.

maintenance item codes when the

remaining oil life drops to 15 percent.

Maintenance Due Now

The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1

The engine oil has almost reached

percent. Press the

button to

the end of its service life, and the

switch to another display.

maintenance items should be

inspected and serviced as soon as

possible.

Maintenance Past Due

The engine oil has passed its service life,

The engine oil life has passed.

and a negative distance appears after

The maintenance items must be

driving over 10 miles (U.S. models) or

inspected and serviced immediately.

10 km (Canadian models). The negative

distance on the display blinks.

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

Maintenance

 

Continued 575

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance Service Items
System Message

Maintenance Minder Message

Indicator

Main Item

Sub Items

 

1Maintenance Service Items

 

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
U.S. models

 

Maintenance

 

CODE Maintenance Main Items

● Replace engine oil*1

● Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check expiration date for Temporary Tire Repair kit bottle (If equipped)
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles.

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

● Rotate tires

● Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
● Replace transmission fluid*4

● Replace spark plugs
● Inspect valve clearance

● Replace engine coolant

● Replace brake fluid*5
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles.

*4: Continuously variable transmission models Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 25,000 miles.

*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

576

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Canadian models 1Maintenance Service Items

 

• Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3

if they are noisy.

 

CODE Maintenance Main Items

● Replace engine oil*1

● Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 24,000 km.

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 24,000 km.

*4: Continuously variable transmission models Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 40,000 km.

*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

● Rotate tires

● Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
● Replace transmission fluid*4

● Replace spark plugs
● Inspect valve clearance

● Replace engine coolant

● Replace brake fluid*5
● Service front and rear brakes
Check expiration date for Temporary Tire Repair kit bottle (If equipped)
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#

Maintenance

 

Continued 577

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance

 

Resetting the Display
Reset the Maintenance Minder display if you have performed the maintenance service.

 

ENTER Button

3 / 4Button

(Display/Information) Button

Turn the ignition switch to ON w*1.
Press the (display/information) button repeatedly until the appears.
Press the ENTER button.
Press and hold the ENTER button for about 10 seconds to enter the reset mode.
Press 3 / 4 button to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All Due Items (You can also select Cancel to end the process).
Press the ENTER button to reset the selected item.
Repeat from step 4 for other items you wish to reset.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Resetting the Display

 

NOTICE

Failure to reset the relevant item(s) after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the Maintenance Minder display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the relevant maintenance item(s) yourself.

Models with color audio system

You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the customized features on the driver information interface.

Customized Features P. 134
Models with Display Audio

You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen.

Customized Features P. 350
578

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood

 

1.5 L engine models

 

Engine Oil Fill Cap

U.S. models

Washer Fluid

(Blue Cap)

Reserve Tank Reserve Tank Cap

Engine Oil Dipstick

(Orange)

Brake/Clutch* Fluid

 

(Black Cap)

Canadian models

Washer Fluid

(Blue Cap)

Battery

 

Maintenance

* Not available on all models Continued 579

Maintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood
2.0 L engine models

 

Washer Fluid

(Blue Cap)

Reserve Tank

Reserve Tank Cap

Maintenance

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Brake/Clutch Fluid (Black Cap)

Battery

Engine Oil Dipstick (Black)

580

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Opening the Hood

 

Hood Release Handle

 

Pull

 

Lever

 

Support Rod

Grip

Clamp

Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake.
Pull the hood release handle under the driver’s side lower corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull up the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.
Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.

1Opening the Hood

 

WARNING
The hood support rod can become very hot due to heat from the engine.

To ensure against possible burns, do not handle the metal section of the rod: Use the foam grip instead.

NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers.

NOTICE

Do not press the engine cover* forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.

When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Maintenance

 

* Not available on all models 581

Maintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil

 

Honda Genuine Motor Oil
Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s

 

performance and longevity. If you drive the

vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,

the engine may fail or be damaged.

This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving

and that it meets the American Petroleum

Institute’s latest requirements.

1Recommended Engine Oil

 

Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.

Maintenance

Ambient Temperature

 

Synthetic oil
Use Honda Genuine Motor Oil or another

commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for

the ambient temperature as shown.

You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.

582

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check

 

We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.

1.

Remove the dipstick (orange or black).

1.5 L engine models

2.

Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or

paper towel.

 

Insert the dipstick back all the way into its hole.

2.0 L engine models

1Oil Check

 

If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill.

 

Maintenance

Continued 583

Maintenance Under the HooduOil Check
1.5 L engine models

 

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

 

2.0 L engine models

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

 

Maintenance

Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
1Oil Check

 

Under certain driving conditions, it is normal for the engine oil level to rise above the upper mark. If you have a concern, consult a dealer for details.

584

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

 

1.5 L engine models

 

Engine Oil

Fill Cap

 

2.0 L engine models

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
Add oil slowly.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely.
Wait for three minutes and recheck the engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil

 

NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and engine damage.

If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.

 

Maintenance

585

Maintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.

Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver information interface.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of

Maintenance

 

1.5 L engine models

 

Screw Under Cover

 

2.0 L engine models

Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the engine off.
Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap.
Remove the phillips head screws and slotted head screws by turning 90° counterclockwise on the undercarriage and remove the under cover.
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.

Screw Under Cover

586

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

1.5 L engine models

 

Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.
Drain Bolt

Washer

 

2.0 L engine models

Drain Bolt

Washer

 

Maintenance

Continued 587

Maintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
1.5 L engine models

 

Oil Filter

2.0 L engine models

Oil Filter

 

Maintenance

Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.
Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.

Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter gasket.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:

30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)

Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including

filter):

1.5 L engine models

 

3.7 US qt (3.5 L)

2.0 L engine models

 

5.7 US qt (5.4 L)

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine.
Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.
Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.

When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work.

588

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant

 

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

1Engine Coolant

 

WARNING
Removing the reserve tank cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Checking the Coolant

1.5 L engine models

Reserve Tank

 

2.0 L engine models

Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank.
u If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the reserve tank cap.

NOTICE

Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about −31°F (−35°C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines.

Maintenance

 

Reserve Tank

Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result

in corrosion, causing the cooling system to

malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed

and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as

possible.

Continued 589

Maintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Maintenance

 

Adding the Coolant

1.5 L engine models

Reserve Tank Cap

2.0 L engine models

Reserve Tank Cap

Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
Turn the reserve tank cap 1/8 turn counter-clockwise and relieve any pressure in the cooling system.
Push down and turn the reserve tank cap counter-clockwise to remove it.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it reaches the MAX mark.
Put the reserve tank cap back on, and tighten it fully.
1Engine Coolant

 

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.

1Adding the Coolant

NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.

590

Maintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Transmission Fluid

Continuously variable transmission models

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda HCF – 2

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Do not attempttocheckorchangethecontinuouslyvariabletransmissionfluid yourself.

Manual transmission models

Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda MTF

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Do not attempt to check or change the manual transmission fluid yourself.

1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid

 

NOTICE

Do not mix Honda HCF-2 with other transmission fluids.

Using a transmission fluid other than Honda HCF-2 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage the transmission.

Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda HCF-2 is not covered by Honda’s new vehicle limited warranty.

1Manual Transmission Fluid

If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil as a temporary measure.

Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does not contain the proper additives for the transmission and continued use can cause decreased shifting performance and lead to transmission damage.

Maintenance

591

 

Maintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch* Fluid
Brake/Clutch* Fluid

 

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch*.

Checking the Brake Fluid
1Brake/Clutch* Fluid

 

NOTICE

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive damage.

1.5 L engine models

 

MAX

MIN

Brake Reserve Tank

 

2.0 L engine models

Maintenance

MAX

MIN

Brake Reserve Tank

 

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reserve tank.

Manual transmission models

The brake fluid reserve tank is also used for your vehicle’s clutch fluid. As long as you keep the brake fluid level as instructed above, there is no need for checking the clutch fluid level.

If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.

* Not available on all models
Maintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Refilling Window Washer Fluid

 

Except Canadian models with 1.5 L engine

 

Cap

2.0 L engine models

Open the cap and check the amount of window washer fluid.

If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

Canadian models

 

If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the driver information interface.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid

 

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially available windshield washer fluid.

Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime scale build up.

Cap

Canadian 1.5 L engine models

Cap

Maintenance

 

593

Replacing Light Bulbs

Headlight Bulbs

 

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)*

High beam headlight: LED type*

Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type)*

Low beam headlight: LED type*

1Headlight Bulbs

 

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.

Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

Maintenance

 

High Beam Headlights

Models with halogen headlights

 

Coupler

Tab

Bulb

Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to remove.
Insert a new bulb into the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise.
Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Models with LED headlights

Headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

* Not available on all models
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

Low Beam Headlights

Models with halogen headlights

 

Bulb

Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to remove.
Insert a new bulb into the headlight assembly and turn it clockwise.
Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb.
Tab Coupler

 

Maintenance

595

Replacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs*
Fog Light Bulbs*

 

Models with halogen fog lights

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

Fog Light: 35 W (H8 for halogen bulb type)

1. Remove the clips using a flat-tip

 

Bolt

screwdriver, remove the bolt, and push up the under cover.

1Fog Light Bulbs*

 

Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center pin to remove the clip.

Maintenance

 

Clips

Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push

until it is flat.

Push until the pin

is flat.

* Not available on all models
Replacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs*
Bulb Coupler

 

Tab

Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to remove.
Insert a new bulb into the fog light assembly and turn it clockwise.
Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb.
1Fog Light Bulbs*

 

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Models with LED fog lights

Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

 

Maintenance

* Not available on all models 597

Replacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Front Turn Signal Light Bulbs

 

Models with halogen headlights

 

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

Front Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)

1.

Turn the socket counter-clockwise and

Socket

Bulb

2.

remove it.

Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

 

1Front Turn Signal Light Bulbs

 

Models with LED headlights

Front turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Maintenance

598

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Side Marker Light Bulbs

Front Side Marker Light Bulbs

 

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

Front Side Marker Light: 3 W

1.5 L engine models

 

Tab

Screws

 

Bulb

Socket

Remove the screws, and pull the inner fender back.
Push the tab to remove the light assembly.
Driver side

Turn the socket counter-clockwise to remove it, then remove the old bulb.
Insert a new bulb.
Maintenance

 

Continued 599

 

Maintenance

Replacing Light BulbsuFront Side Marker Light Bulbs
Passenger side

 

Turn the socket clockwise to remove it, then remove the old bulb.
Insert a new bulb.
Bulb

Socket

2.0 L engine models

 

Turn the steering wheel all the way to the

Screws

opposite side from the light being replaced.

Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel to

the left.

Inner

Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the

right.

Fender

2. Remove the screws, then pull the inner

fender back.

600

Replacing Light BulbsuParking/Daytime Running Lights
Bulb

 

Socket

 

Bulb

Driver side

Turn the socket counter-clockwise to remove it, then remove the old bulb.
Insert a new bulb.
Passenger side

 

Turn the socket clockwise to remove it, then remove the old bulb.
Insert a new bulb.

Socket

Parking/Daytime Running Lights

 

Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*

 

Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models 601

Replacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Brake Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Back-Up Light Bulbs

 

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

Brake Light: 21 W

Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)

Back-Up Light: 16 W

Maintenance

 

Bolts

 

Bulbs

Bulb

Socket Sockets

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver or socket to remove the bolts.
Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.
Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it.
Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Slide the light assembly onto the guide on the body.
Align the pins with the body grommets, then push in until they fully seat.
602

uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillights/Rear Side Marker Lights

Taillights/Rear Side Marker Lights

 

Taillights/rear side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Taillights

 

Taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Rear License Plate Light

 

Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

High-Mount Brake Light

 

High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

 

Maintenance

603

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

Checking Wiper Blades

 

If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

 

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK 0*1.
While holding the wiper switch in the MIST position, turn the ignition switch to ON w*1, then to LOCK 0*1.
u Both wiper arms are set to the maintenance position as shown in the image.

 

1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

 

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.

Maintenance

 

Lift both wiper arms.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

604

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
Wiper Arm

 

Holder

Tab

 

Wiper

Blade

Press up on and hold the tab, then slide the holder off the wiper arm.
Pull the end of the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow in the image until it is out of the holder’s end cap.
End cap at

the bottom

6. Pull the wiper blade in the opposite

Wiper Blade

direction to slide it out of the holder.

 

Holder

Maintenance

 

Continued 605

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
Wiper

 

Blade

Holder

Cap

 

Insert the flat side of the new wiper blade onto the bottom part of the holder. Insert the blade all the way.
Install the end of the wiper blade into the cap.
Slide the holder onto the wiper arm until it locks.
Lower both wiper arms.
Turn the ignition switch to ON w*1 and hold the wiper switch in the MIST position until both wiper arms return to the standard position.
Maintenance

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

606

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber*

Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber*

 

Wiper Arm

 

Holder

Tab

 

Wiper

Blade

End cap at the bottom

Raise the wiper arm off.
Press up on and hold the tab, then slide the holder off the wiper arm.
Pull the end of the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow in the image until it is out of the holder’s end cap.
1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber*

 

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm, it may damage the rear window.

Maintenance

 

* Not available on all models Continued 607

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber*
4. Pull the wiper blade in the opposite

Wiper Blade

direction to slide it out of holder.

 

Holder

 

Wiper

Blade

Holder

 

Cap

Maintenance

Insert the flat side of the new wiper blade onto the bottom part of the holder. Insert the blade all the way.
Install the end of the wiper blade into the cap.
Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it locks.
Lower the wiper arm.
608

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires

 

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.

Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.

Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare*. Even tires in good condition can lose 1–2 psi (10–20 kPa, 0.1–0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.

Look for:

Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
Excessive tread wear.
Wear Indicators P. 614
Cracks or other damage around valve stem. * Not available on all models
1Checking Tires

 

WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.

If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.

U.S. models

Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS.

TPMS Calibration P. 483
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.

Check the spare tire* pressure once a month or before long trips.

Maintenance

 

609

Checking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Tire and Loading Information Label

 

The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.

 

Label

Example

Tire Labeling

 

1Tire and Loading Information Label

 

The tire and loading information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb contains:

a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not

exceed this weight.

c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and

spare.

1Tire Sizes

Maintenance

 

Example Tire Size

 

Tire

Identification

Number (TIN)

Maximum

Tire Load

Maximum

Tire Pressure

Tire Size

Tire Sizes
The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described as shown.

Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means.

P205/55 R16 89H

Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle). 205: Tire width in millimeters.
55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a percentage of its width).

Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 16: Rim diameter in inches.
89: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

610

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT B97R FW6X 2209

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like

DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all

the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

requirements of the U.S. Department of

Transportation.

■ Glossary of Tire Terminology

B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.

FW6X: Tire type code.

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at

22 09: Date of manufacture.

least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Year

Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given

inflation pressure.

Week

Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can

hold.

Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum

permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended

by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves

designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

 

Maintenance

611

Checking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance

 

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

 

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

 

For example:

Treadwear 200

Traction AA

Temperature A

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

612

Checking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

1Traction

 

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

1Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Maintenance

 

613

Checking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
Wear Indicators

 

Example of a Wear

 

Indicator mark

The groove where the wear indicator is located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.

Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads.

1Checking Tires

 

2.0 L engine models

High speed driving

We recommend that you do not drive faster than the posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive at sustained high speeds (over 137 mph or 220 km/h), adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.

Tire Size 245/30ZR20 90Y

Number of

Maintenance

 

Tire Service Life

 

The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare*, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

Pressure

occupants

Front: 41 psi (280 kPa, 2.9 kgf/cm2)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Front: 42 psi (290 kPa, 3.0 kgf/cm2)
Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)
Models with FORGED engraved on the wheel

This vehicle is equipped with high grip tires.

Due to their focus on dry-grip performance, these tires have shallower tread grooves and wear faster than ordinary commercial tires. Periodically check the tread depth.

Drive at a safe speed in the rain and on wet roads.

* Not available on all models
Checking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Tire and Wheel Replacement

 

Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system to work incorrectly.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.

Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

 

WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner’s manual.

 

Maintenance

615

Checking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Tire Rotation

 

Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

 

Front

Tires with rotation marks
Maintenance

Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

 

1Tire Rotation

 

Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Front

Direction Mark

U.S. models

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the TPMS.

TPMS Calibration P. 483
616

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

Winter Tires

 

If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.

Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.

When mounting, refer to the following points.

1Winter Tires

 

WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer, high grip*1 or ultra high performance*2 tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.

*1: Models with FORGED engraved on the wheel

*2: 2.0 L engine models without FORGED engraved on the wheel

Maintenance

 

Continued 617

Checking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance

 

For winter tires:

Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:

Install them on the front tires only.
Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the chains listed below:
Models with 215/55R16 tires

 

Models with 215/50R17 tires

 

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1032

1.5 L engine models with 235/40R18 tires

 

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1034

2.0 L engine models with 235/40R18 tires

 

Cable-type: SCC AUTO TRUCK 0154705

Models with 245/30ZR20 tires*1

 

Not recommended to use any type of chains

*1: On 245/30ZR20 tires, you cannot install any type of tire chains. If you have to use tire chains, replace the original tires with the 235/40R18 tires.

Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.
Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
Drive slowly.
618

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuCold Weather Driving

2.0 L engine models

 

Cold Weather Driving

 

Summer Only tires and High Grip tires*1 or Ultra High Performance (UHP) tires*2 are very sensitive to ambient temperatures and are designed to be used at temperatures above 45°F (7°C). If the vehicle is operated with Summer Only tires or UHP tires at temperatures below 45°F (7°C), the tires will provide decreasing amounts of grip and other performance attributes. If the vehicle is operated with Summer Only tires or UHP tires at temperatures below 20°F (–7°C)*1 or –4°F (–20°C)*2, the tire tread may lose their elasticity and become brittle, resulting in permanent damage to the tread. A damaged tire may fail during use. Therefore, if you operate the vehicle when ambient temperatures are below 45°F (7°C), we recommend that you install other tires (e.g., mud+snow, winter) that are designed to provide appropriate performance attributes under the anticipated conditions.

1Cold Weather Driving

 

WARNING
Use of Summer Only tires or Ultra High Performance tires at temperatures below 45°F (7°C) may lead to a loss of performance and control, which could result in a crash, serious injury or death.

 

Maintenance

*1: Models with FORGED engraved on the wheel

*2: Models without FORGED engraved on the wheel

619

Battery

Maintenance

 

Checking the Battery

 

The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver information interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

 

Check the battery terminals for corrosion

Battery monthly.

If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:

The audio system is disabled.
Reactivating the audio system P. 229
The clock resets.
Adjusting the Clock P. 144
Canadian models only

The immobilizer system needs to be reset.

Immobilizer System Indicator P. 94
1Battery

 

WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.

When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.

WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds.

Wash your hands after handling.

620

BatteryuCharging the Battery
Charging the Battery

 

Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.

Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

1Battery

When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.

When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications.

Consult a dealer for more information.

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire Pressure/TPMS* and Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) may come on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1 after reconnecting a battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If none of them do, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

 

Maintenance

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models 621

Remote Transmitter Care

Maintenance

 

Replacing the Button Battery

 

If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

Master Keys with Remote Transmitter*

Screw Battery type: CR1620

1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips-head screwdriver.

Open the remote transmitter.
u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratching the transmitter.

Battery

3. Remove the button battery with the small

flat-tip screwdriver.

 

Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity.
1Replacing the Button Battery

 

WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD

The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children.

If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately.

NOTICE

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.

* Not available on all models
uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery

Smart Entry Remote*

Battery type: CR2032

Remove the built-in key.
Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a coin. u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent

Battery

scratching the smart entry remote.

u Remove carefully to avoid losing the

buttons.

3. Make sure to replace the battery with the

correct polarity.

Maintenance

 

* Not available on all models 623

Climate Control System Maintenance

Maintenance

 

Air Conditioning

 

To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

Dust and Pollen Filter

 

The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.

We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

1Climate Control System Maintenance

 

NOTICE

Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed.

The air conditioner label is found under the hood:

Safety Labels P. 80
Specifications P. 684
Canadian models

: Caution

: Flammable

Refrigerant

: Requires Registered

Technician to Service

: Air Conditioning

System

1Dust and Pollen Filter

If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

624

Cleaning

Interior Care

 

Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.

Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.

Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loops of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

 

Loop

1Interior Care

 

Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.

Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle.

If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.

Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth.

Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

Maintenance

 

Continued 625

CleaninguInterior Care
Maintenance

 

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Floor Mats

Unlock

Lock

The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor anchors, which keep the mat from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat.

1Cleaning the Window

 

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front sensor camera and the rainfall/light sensor*.

Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) P. 178
Automatic Intermittent Wipers* P. 185
Front Sensor Camera P. 546
1Floor Mats

If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.

* Not available on all models
CleaninguInterior Care
Maintaining Genuine Leather*
To properly clean leather:

Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90% water and 10% neutral soap.
Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.
Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.
Alcantara® Care*
After having dusted the material, moisten a soft cloth with clean lukewarm water, wring it dry and blot gently to remove any dirt. Once dry, lightly brush with a soft brush.

1Maintaining Genuine Leather *

 

It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the leather. In addition, please note that some dark colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats resulting in discoloration or stains.

 

Maintenance

* Not available on all models 627

CleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance

 

Exterior Care

 

Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions:

If driving on roads with road salt.
If driving in coastal areas.
If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
Using an Automated Car Wash
Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
Fold in the door mirrors.
For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off.
Using High Pressure Cleaners
Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to enter the vehicle interior.
Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead, use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
1Washing the Vehicle

 

Do not spray water into the air intake and hood intake* vents. It can cause a malfunction.

1.5 L engine models

Air Intake Vents

2.0 L engine models

Hood

Intake Vent

Air Intake

Vents

Do not spray water onto the fuel fill door directly. A high-pressure spray may cause it to open.

* Not available on all models
uuCleaninguExterior Care

Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.

Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

1Washing the Vehicle

 

If you need to lift the wiper arms away from the windshield, first set the wiper arms to the maintenance position.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber P. 604
Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel system or engine.

1Applying Wax

NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.

Maintenance

 

Continued 629

CleaninguExterior Care
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside-lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.

Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.

However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

 

Maintenance

630

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories

 

When installing accessories, check the following:

Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and delay your reaction to driving conditions.
Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS Airbag, on the sides or backs of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.
Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 674

Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
1Accessories and Modifications

 

WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding accessories and modifications.

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

 

Maintenance

631

Accessories and ModificationsuModifications
Modifications

 

Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect.

Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.

The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.

Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.

 

Maintenance

632

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools

Types of Tools 634

If a Tire Goes Flat

Models with temporary tire repair kit

 

Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire 635

Models with a compact spare tire

 

Changing a Flat Tire 648

Handling of the Jack*

 

Canadian models with temporary tire repair kit

How to Set Up the Jack 656

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine 659

 

Models with smart entry system

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak ..660

Models with smart entry system

 

Emergency Engine Stop 661

If the Battery Is Dead 662

Shift Lever Does Not Move 665

Overheating 666

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes

On 668

If the Charging System Indicator Comes

On 668

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes

On or Blinks 669

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes

On or Blinks 670

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or

Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System

Indicator (Amber) Comes On 671

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator Comes On 672

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Comes On or Blinks* 673

Fuses

Fuse Locations 674

Inspecting and Changing Fuses 678

Emergency Towing 679

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door.. 680

If You Cannot Open the Hatch 681

Refueling 682

* Not available on all models 633

Tools

Handling the Unexpected

 

Types of Tools

 

Models with tool case

Jack

Funnel

Towing Hook

Wheel Nut Wrench/

Jack Handle

Jack Handle Bar

 

Models with tool bag

Jack*

Funnel

Towing Hook

Wheel Nut Wrench/

Jack Handle*

Jack Handle Bar

1Types of Tools

 

The tools are stored in the cargo area.

* Not available on all models
If a Tire Goes Flat

Models with temporary tire repair kit

 

Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

 

If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise severely damaged, you will need to have the vehicle towed. If the tire only has a small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can use the temporary tire repair kit so that you can drive to the nearest service station for a more permanent repair.

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then stop in a safe place.

Park the vehicle on a firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking brake.
Put the transmission into R.
Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
1Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

 

The kit should not be used in the following situations. Instead, contact a dealer or roadside assistance to have the vehicle towed.

The tire sealant has expired.
More than one tire is punctured.
The puncture or cut is larger than 3/16 inch (4 mm).
The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is outside the contact area.
When the puncture is:

Use Kit

Smaller than 3/16 inch

Yes

(4 mm)

Contact

Area

Larger than 3/16 inch

No

(4 mm)

Damage has been caused by driving with the tire extremely under inflated.
The tire bead is no longer seated.
The rim is damaged.
Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the tire. If you remove it from the tire, you may not be able to repair the puncture using the kit.

NOTICE

Do not use a puncture-repairing agent other than the one provided in the kit that came with your vehicle. If a different agent is used, you may permanently damage the tire pressure sensor.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 635

If a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire

Power Plug

Instruction Manual

Air Only Side

Sealant/Air Hose

Selector Knob

Sealant/Air Side

Pressure Gauge

Inflator Switch

Pressure Relief Button

Repair Notification Label

Speed Restriction Label

U.S. Canada

U.S. Canada

1Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire

 

Repair notification label and speed restriction label are applied to the side of temporary tire repair kit.

When making a temporary repair, carefully read the instruction manual provided with the kit.

636

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Strap

 

Tire Repair Kit

Pull the strap on the cargo area floor lid and open the lid.
Take the kit out of the case.
Place the kit face up, on flat ground near the flat tire, and away from traffic. Do not place the kit on its side.
Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 637

If a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Injecting Sealant and Air

Valve Cap

Valve Stem

 

Sealant/Air Hose

 

Sealant/Air Hose

Valve Stem

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Remove the sealant/air hose from the packaging.
Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire valve stem. Screw it until it is tight.
1Injecting Sealant and Air

 

CAUTION
Tire sealant contains substances that are harmful if inhaled, ingested or if contact is made with the eyes or skin.

Always use in a well-ventilated area and use gloves and safety glasses for protection; do not ingest.

For skin or eye contact, flush with cool water; if ingested, rinse mouth with water. In all cases, seek medical attention if necessary.

In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily. In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before using.

The sealant can permanently stain clothing and other materials. Be careful during handling and wipe away any spills immediately.

638

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

U.S.

 

Canada

*1: U.S. models

*2: Canadian models

Plug in the compressor to the accessory power socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a door or window.

Start the engine.
u Keep the engine running while injecting sealant and air.

2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 79

Turn the selector knob to REPAIR*1,
SEALANT/AIR*2, PRODUIT ANTIFUITE/ AIR*2.

1Injecting Sealant and Air

 

WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an enclosed or even partly enclosed area can cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon monoxide.

Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can cause unconsciousness and even death. Only run the engine to power the air compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

NOTICE

Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit compressor for more than 15 minutes. The compressor can overheat and become permanently damaged.

Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure shown on the pressure gauge will appear higher than actual. After the sealant injection is complete the pressure will drop and then begin to rise again as the tire is inflated with air. This is normal. To accurately measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air compressor off only after the sealant injection is complete.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 639

If a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Pressure Gauge

 

ON

OFF

 

Sealant/Air Hose

Valve Stem

Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit. u The compressor starts injecting sealant
and air into the tire.

u When the sealant injection is complete continue to add air.

After the air pressure reaches front: 35 psi
(240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (230 kPa), turn off the kit.

u To check the pressure, occasionally turn off the compressor and read the gauge.

Unplug the power plug from the accessory power socket.
Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
Press the pressure relief button until the gauge returns 0 psi (0 kPa).
1Injecting Sealant and Air

 

If the required air pressure is not reached within 10 minutes, the tire may be too severely damaged for the kit to provide the necessary seal, and your vehicle will need to be towed.

See a Honda dealer for a replacement sealant bottle and proper disposal of an empty bottle.

640

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Repair Notification Label

 

U.S.

Apply the repair notification label to the flat surface of the wheel.
u The wheel surface must be clean to ensure the label adheres properly.

Canada

Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
Handling

U.S.

 

Canada

Speed Restriction

Label

Apply the speed restriction label to the location as shown.
Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes. u Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
the Unexpected

 

Continued 641

If a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Recheck the air pressure using the sealant/ air hose on the compressor.

Sealant/Air Hose

Handling the Unexpected

 

642

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

5. Turn the selector knob to AIR*1, AIR

 

U.S. ONLY*2, AIR SEULEMENT*2.

u Do not turn the air compressor on to

check the pressure.

2 Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 645

Canada

6. If the air pressure is

• Less than 25 psi (175 kPa):

Do not add air or continue driving. The

leak is too severe. Call for help and have

your vehicle towed.

2 Emergency Towing P. 679

• Front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (230

kPa) or more:

Continue driving for another 10 minutes

or until you reach the nearest service

station, whichever is sooner.

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you

have not reached a service station, stop

and check the tire pressure.

u If the air pressure does not go down

after the 10 minutes of driving, you do

not need to check the pressure any

more.

*1: U.S. models

*2: Canadian models

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 643

If a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Greater than 25 psi (175 kPa), but less than front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi

(230 kPa):

Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the tire pressure reaches front: 35 psi (240 kPa)/rear: 33 psi (230 kPa).

Inflating an Under-inflated Tire P. 645
Then drive carefully for 10 more minutes or until you reach the nearest service station, whichever is sooner.

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If you have not reached a service station, stop and check the tire pressure.

u You should repeat this procedure as long as the air pressure is within this range.

Unplug the kit from the accessory power socket.
Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire valve stem.
Reinstall the valve cap.

1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire

 

WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an enclosed or even partly enclosed area can cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon monoxide.

Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can cause unconsciousness and even death. Only run the engine to power the air compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

Pressure Relief Button

 

Press the pressure relief button until the gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
Repackage and properly stow the kit.
644

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

Inflating an Under-inflated Tire
You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured, under-inflated tire.

Sealant/Air Hose

1. Open the cargo area floor lid.

2 Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair

the Flat Tire P. 636

 

2. Remove the kit from the case.

3. Place the kit, face up, on flat ground near the flat tire, away from traffic. Do not place the kit on its side.

Remove the sealant/air hose from the kit.
Remove the valve cap.

1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire

 

NOTICE

Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit compressor for more than 15 minutes. The compressor can overheat and become permanently damaged.

Handling the Unexpected

Valve Cap

6. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire

Sealant/Air Hose

valve stem. Screw it until it is tight.

 

Valve Stem

Continued 645

If a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
7.

Plug in the kit to the accessory power

1Inflating an Under-inflated Tire

socket.

3WARNING

u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a

8.

door or window.

Running the engine with the vehicle in an

Start the engine.

enclosed or even partly enclosed area can

u Keep the engine running while injecting

cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon

air.

monoxide.

 

Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 79
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can

9. Turn the selector knob to AIR*1, AIR

cause unconsciousness and even death.

Handling

U.S.

ONLY*2, AIR SEULEMENT*2.

Only run the engine to power the air

10. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit.

compressor with the vehicle outdoors.

u The compressor starts to inject air into

the

Canada

the tire.

11. Inflate the tire to the specified air pressure.

Unexpected

 

*1: U.S. models

*2: Canadian models

646

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

12.

Turn off the kit.

u Check the pressure gauge on the air

compressor.

u If overinflated, press the pressure relief

button.

13.

Unplug the kit from the accessory power

socket.

14.

Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire

Pressure Relief Button

valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.

15.

Press the pressure relief button until the

gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).

16.

UnexpectedtheHandling

Repackage and properly stow the kit.

 

647

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire Models with a compact spare tire

Handling the Unexpected

 

Changing a Flat Tire

 

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake.
Continuously variable transmission models

 

Put the transmission into P.
Manual transmission models

 

Put the transmission into R.
All models

 

Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK 0*1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Changing a Flat Tire

 

Follow compact spare precautions:

Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

NOTICE

Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service.

The subwoofer*, a large black enclosure, is located on the rear right side. Do not store anything in this area. Doing so may compromise vehicle audio performance.

* Not available on all models
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
Models with tool case Models with tool case

 

1. Open the cargo area floor lid.

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Models with tool bag

 

Strap

 

Tab

Models with tool bag

Pull the strap on the cargo area floor lid and open the lid.
All models

 

Turn and pull the tab to open the compartment cover located on the left side of the cargo area.
Handling the Unexpected

 

Cover

Continued 649

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Jack

 

Models with tool case

Tool Case

Spare Tire

 

Models with tool bag

Tool bag

Turn the jack’s end bracket to loosen it, then remove it.
Models with tool case

Take the tool case out of the cargo area. Take the jack handle bar and wheel nut wrench out of the tool case.
Models with tool bag

Take the tool bag out of the compartment. Take the jack handle bar and wheel nut wrench out of the tool bag.
All models

 

Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
650

 

Wheel

Blocks

The tire to be replaced.

 

Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.
Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.
If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 651

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
How to Set Up the Jack
Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.

Jacking Points

1How to Set Up the Jack

 

WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.

Jacking Point

 

Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is

resting in the jack notch.

Use the jack provided in your vehicle.

Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or may not fit the jacking point.

The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely:

HandlingtheUnexpected

 

Jack

Handle

Wheel Nut

Bar

Wrench as Jack Handle

 

Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.
Do not use while the engine is running.
Use only where the ground is firm and level.
Use only at the jacking points.
Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
Do not put anything on top of or underneath the jack.
652

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Replacing the Flat Tire
Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel

with a clean cloth.

3. Mount the compact spare tire.

4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating.

Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order.

Wheel nut torque:

1.5 L engine models

 

80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

2.0 L engine models

 

94 lbf∙ft (127 N∙m, 13 kgf∙m)

1Replacing the Flat Tire

 

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 653

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Storing the Flat Tire

Center Cap

 

Spacer Cone

Wing Bolt

For For full-

compact size tire spare tire

Remove the center cap.
Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
Store the jack in the compartment on the left side. Turn the jack’s end bracket to lock it in place.
Models with tool case

Securely put the jack handle bar and wheel nut wrench back in the tool case. Store the case in the cargo area.
Models with tool bag

Securely put the jack handle bar and wheel nut wrench back in the tool bag. Store the bag in the compartment.
1Storing the Flat Tire

 

WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.

654

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire*
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), Tire Pressures Monitor Problem will appear on the driver information interface and the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on; however, this is normal and is no cause for concern.

Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.

TPMS Calibration P. 483
Handling the Unexpected

 

* Not available on all models 655

Handling of the Jack*

How to Set Up the Jack

 

1. Turn and pull the tab to open the compartment cover located on the left side

 

of the cargo area.

Tab

2. Turn the jack’s end bracket to loosen it, then remove it.

Cover

 

Jack

Handling the

Unexpected

 

1How to Set Up the Jack

 

WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

* Not available on all models
Handling of the Jack*uHow to Set Up the Jack
Jacking Points

 

Jacking Point

Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.
Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.

1How to Set Up the Jack

 

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.

Use the jack provided in your vehicle.

Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or may not fit the jacking point.

The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely:

Do not use while the engine is running.
Use only where the ground is firm and level.
Use only at the jacking points.
Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
Do not put anything on top of or underneath the jack.
Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 657

Handling of the Jack*uHow to Set Up the Jack
6. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar

 

and the jack handle, until the tire is off the

ground.

Handling the Unexpected

 

658

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine

 

If the engine does not start, check the starter.

1Checking the Engine

If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an

assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.

2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 662

Starter condition

Checklist

Starter doesn’t turn or turns

Models with smart entry system

over slowly.

Check for a message on the

driver information interface.

The battery may be dead. Check

If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears

2

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 660

each of the items on the right and

uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.

respond accordingly.

2

ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 172

Check the brightness of the interior lights.

Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.

If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all

2

Battery P. 620

If the interior lights come on normally

2

Fuses P. 674

 

Handling the

The starter turns over normally but the engine doesn’t start.

There may be a problem with the fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.

Review the engine start procedure.

Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.

Starting the Engine P. 451
Check the immobilizer system indicator.

When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.

Immobilizer System P. 163
Unexpected

 

Check the fuel level.

There should be enough fuel in the tank.

Fuel Gauge P. 122
Check the fuse.

Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 678
If the problem continues:

Emergency Towing P. 679
659

Handling the Unexpected

 

Engine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
Models with smart entry system

 

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

 

If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the driver information interface, and the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes, and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows:

Touch the center of the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the H logo on the smart

entry remote while the ENGINE START/

STOP button is flashing. The buttons on

the smart entry remote should be facing

you.

u The indicator flashes for about 30

seconds.

Depress the brake pedal (continuously variable transmission) or clutch pedal (manual transmission) and press the ENGINE START/STOP button within 10

seconds after the beeper sounds and the

ENGINE START/STOP button changes

from flashing to on.

u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode

will change to ACCESSORY.

660

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop

Models with smart entry system

 

Emergency Engine Stop

 

The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations:

Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button about for two seconds.
Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place. With manual transmission models you can also downshift the transmission to utilize engine braking.

Continuously variable transmission models

 

The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.

To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop.

Canadian continuously variable transmission models

 

Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal.

Manual transmission models

The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

1Emergency Engine Stop

 

Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be turned off.

If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving, the beeper sounds.

Handling the Unexpected

 

661

If the Battery Is Dead

Jump Starting Procedure

Jump Starting Procedure

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood.

1If the Battery Is Dead

 

WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow

Handling the Unexpected

 

Cover

 

1.5 L engine models

Booster Battery

2.0 L engine models

Open the cover on your vehicle’s battery positive + terminal.
Connect the first jumper cable to your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u When using an automotive battery charger to boost your 12-volt battery, select a lower charging voltage than 15-volt. Check the charger manual for the proper setting.

Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery – terminal.
the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.

Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.

Booster Battery

662

uuIf the Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure

1.5 L engine models

 

Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.
If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine and increase its rpm slightly.
Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
1If the Battery Is Dead

 

Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.

2.0 L engine models

Handling the

Unexpected

 

Continued 663

If the Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure
What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order.

Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.
Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery – terminal.
Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery + terminal.
1What to Do After the Engine Starts

 

The indicators for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*, Road Departure Mitigation (RDM), Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, low tire Pressure/TPMS* and Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) may come on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1 after reconnecting a battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models
Shift Lever Does Not Move

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the P position.

Releasing the Lock
Cover

 

Slot

 

Release

Button

Shift Lock

Release Slot

Set the parking brake.
Models without smart entry system

Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

 

Remove the built-in key from the smart entry remote.
All models

 

Move the removable beverage holder tray rearward.
2 Front seat beverage holders P. 205

Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-tip screwdriver to remove the cover of the shift lock release slot. Put the tip of the flat-tip screwdriver into the slot and remove it as shown in the image.
Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
While pushing the key in, press the shift lever release button, and place the shift lever into N.
u The lock is now released. Have the shift lever checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Handling the Unexpected

 

665

Overheating

Handling the Unexpected

 

How to Handle Overheating

 

Overheating symptoms are as follows:

The temperature gauge pointer is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses power.
The Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message appears on the driver information interface.
Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
First thing to do
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.

u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides. Then open the hood.

1How to Handle Overheating

 

WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

NOTICE

Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge pointer at the H mark may damage the engine.

Continuing to drive with the Stop Driving When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot. message on the driver information interface may damage the engine.

666

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

Next thing to do

1.5 L engine models

Reserve Tank

2.0 L engine models

Reserve Tank

Last thing to do
Check that the cooling fan is operating and stop the engine once the Stop Driving
When Safe. Engine Temperature Too Hot message on the driver information interface goes off.

u If the cooling fan is not operating, immediately stop the engine.

Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.

1How to Handle Overheating

 

WARNING
Removing the reserve tank cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the reserve tank cap.

If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.

Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge. If the temperature gauge pointer has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down, contact a dealer for repairs.

667

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

Handling the Unexpected

 

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

Reasons for the indicator to come on

Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.

What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
What to do after parking the vehicle
Stop the engine and let it sit for approximately three minutes.
Open the hood and check the oil level.
Oil Check P. 583
Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator. u The indicator goes off: Start driving again.
u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Immediately stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs.

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the battery is not being charged.

 

What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

 

NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery.

668

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink

 

• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control system.

Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer.

What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

 

NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.

If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.

Handling the Unexpected

 

669

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected

 

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

U.S. ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on

 

The brake fluid is low.

• There is a malfunction in the brake system.

■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving

Canada

Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.

If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.

If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the

(Red)

transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.

 

Reason for the indicator to blink
There is a problem with the electric parking brake system.
What to do when the indicator blinks
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

 

Have your vehicle repaired immediately.

It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift the gears.

If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking.

Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work.

Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 671
If you repeatedly operate the electric parking brake in a short period of time, the brake stops operating to prevent heating of the system and the indicator blinks.

It returns to its original state in approximately 1 minute.

670

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

■ If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the

U.S.

same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,

release the parking brake manually or automatically.

Canada

2 Parking Brake P. 549

• If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at

the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,

(Red)

stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer

immediately.

u Preventing the vehicle from moving

U.S.

Continuously variable transmission models

Put the transmission into P.

Canada

Manual transmission models

Put the transmission into 1 or R.

 

(Amber)

If only the Brake System Indicator (Red) is turned off, avoid using the Parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

 

If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able to release it.

If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake system indicator (amber) come on at the same time, the parking brake is working.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work because it is checking the system.

Handling the Unexpected

 

671

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On

Reasons for the indicator to come on

• Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.

If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.

If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Handling the Unexpected

 

672

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks*
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks*

 

Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink

A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on. If the compact spare tire* is installed, the indicator will either come on or it will first blink for about one minute, then stays on.

What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.

Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb.

u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.

If the compact spare tire* causes the indicator to come on, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS.

What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire* causes the indicator to first blink, and then stays on, change the tire to a full- size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS.

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks*

 

NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

Handling the Unexpected

 

* Not available on all models 673

Fuses

Fuse Locations

 

If any electrical devices are not working, turn the ignition switch to LOCK 0*1, and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Located near the battery. Push the tabs to open the box.

Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.

 

Handling the Unexpected

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

674

FusesuFuse Locations
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected

Amps

Option Block 1*

(60

A)

Cooling Fan

50 A*4

30 A*5

1

Audio AMP*

(30

A)

IG Main 2*1

(30

A)

Headlight High Beam Main

30

A

Battery

125 A

EPS

70

A

IG Main 1

30 A*1

50 A*2

2

Fuse Box Option*

(40

A)

Fuse Box 1

60

A

Front Wiper Motor

30

A

Headlight Low Beam Main

30

A

Rear Defroster

40

A

Starter Motor

(30

A)

3

Fuse Box 2

40

A

ABS/VSA Motor

40

A

ABS/VSA FSR

40

A

Blower Motor

40

A

Circuit Protected

Amps

4

5

Cooling Fan*4

(5 A)

6

Washer

15

A

7

FI Main

15 A*4

20 A*5

8

Stop Lights

10

A

9

FI Sub

15

A

10

Injector*4

(15

A)

Sub Fan Motor*5

20

A

11

LAF

5 A

12

FI ECU

10

A

13

Hazard

15

A

14

Rear Heated Seat*

(15

A)

15

IG Coil

15

A

16

Transmission*3

(15

A)

17

Daytime Running Lights

(10

A)

18

Back Up

10

A

19

Audio

(15

A)

20

Parking Lights

10

A

Circuit Protected

Amps

21

Interior Lights

10

A

22

Front Fog Lights*

(15

A)

23

A/C Compressor

10

A

24

Horn

10 A

25

26

Left Headlight Low Beam

10

A

27

Right Headlight Low Beam

10

A

28

29

Left Headlight High Beam

10

A

30

Right Headlight High Beam

10

A

31

Passenger’s Power Seat

(20

A)

Sliding*

Passenger’s Power Seat

(20

A)

32

Reclining*

Adaptive Damper System*5

(15

A)

33

VB ACT

(5 A)

 

*1:Models with smart entry system

*2:Models without smart entry system

*3:Continuously variable transmission models

*4:1.5 L engine models

*5:2.0 L engine models

Handling the Unexpected

 

* Not available on all models Continued 675

FusesuFuse Locations
Interior Fuse Box
Located under the driver’s side dashboard.

 

Handling the Unexpected

 

Fuse Label

Fuse locations are shown on the label on the side panel.

Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.

676

FusesuFuse Locations
Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected

Amps

1

Accessory

10

A

2

Key Lock

(5 A)

3

Rear Wiper Motor*

(10

A)

4

Front Sensor Camera*1, *

(5 A)

Transmission*2, *3

(10

A)

5

Option

(10

A)

6

SRS Indicator

(10

A)

7

Meter

10

A

8

Fuel Pump

15 A*4

20 A*5

9

AIRCON

10 A

10

11

Engine Control*4

5 A

12 Passenger’s Side Door Lock

10

A

13

Driver’s Side Rear Door

10 A

Unlock

14

Rear Driver’s Side Power

(20

A)

Window

Circuit Protected

Amps

15

Front Passenger’s Side

20 A

Power Window

16

Door Lock

20

A

17

Transmission*1, *3

(10

A)

Front Sensor Camera*2, *

(5 A)

18

19

Moonroof

(20

A)

20

21

ACG

10 A

22

Daytime Running Lights

(10

A)

23

24

Front Sensor Camera*

(5 A)

25

Driver’s Door Lock

(10

A)

26

Passenger’s Side Door

10 A

Unlock

27

Rear Passenger’s Side

(20

A)

Power Window

28

Driver’s Power Window

20

A

Circuit Protected

Amps

29

Front Accessory Power

20 A

Socket

30

Smart Entry*1

(10

A)

STS*2

(5 A)

31

Driver’s Power Seat

(20

A)

Reclining*

32

Front Seat Heater*

(20

A)

33

Driver’s Power Seat Sliding*

(20

A)

34

VSA/ABS

10

A

35

SRS

10 A

36

37

Option

(10

A)

38

Driver’s Side Rear Door

10 A

Lock

39

Driver’s Door Unlock

(10

A)

 

*1:Models with smart entry system

*2:Models without smart entry system

*3:Continuously variable transmission models

*4:1.5 L engine models

*5:2.0 L engine models

Handling the Unexpected

 

* Not available on all models 677

FusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Handling the Unexpected

 

Inspecting and Changing Fuses

 

1.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK 0*1. Turn

Blown Fuse

headlights and all accessories off.

2.

Remove the fuse box cover.

3.

Check the large fuse in the engine

compartment.

u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head

Combined

screwdriver to remove the screw and

replace it with a new one.

Fuse

 

Inspect the small fuses in the engine

Fuse Puller

compartment and the vehicle interior.

u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with

the fuse puller and replace it with a new

one.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

 

NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.

Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and confirm the specified amperage on the fuse label.

Fuse Locations P. 674
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage.

There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine compartment fuse box cover.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

678

Emergency Towing

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.

This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing

 

NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle’s weight.

NOTICE

Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.

Make sure the parking brake is released. If you cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must be transported by the flat bed equipment.

Parking Brake P. 549
Handling the Unexpected

 

679

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

Handling the Unexpected

 

What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.

Open the hatch.

Release Cord

Models with tool case

Open the cargo floor lid.
Models with tool bag

2. Pull the strap on the cargo area floor lid and open the lid.

All models

 

Turn and pull the tab to open the compartment cover located on the left side of the cargo area.
Pull the release cord toward you.
u The release cord unlocks the fuel fill door when it is pulled.

1If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

 

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

680

If You Cannot Open the Hatch

What to Do If Unable to Open the Hatch
If you cannot open the hatch, use the following procedure.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the

cover on the back of the hatch.

u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.

Cover

To open the hatch, push the hatch while sliding the lever with the flat-tip

screwdriver.

1If You Cannot Open the Hatch

 

Following up:

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

When you open the hatch from inside, make sure there is enough space around the hatch, and it does not hit anyone or any object.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Lever

681

Refueling

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

 

If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

Turn off the engine.
Press on the edge of the fuel fill door to make it pop up slightly.
u The fuel fill door opens.

Take the funnel out of the cargo area.

2 Types of Tools P. 634

4.

Place the end of the funnel on the lower

Funnel

part of filler opening, then insert it slowly

Handling

and fully.

u Make sure that the end of the funnel

goes down along with the filler pipe.

the

5.

Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel

container.

Unexpected

storing it.

u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.

6.

Remove the funnel from the filler neck.

u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before

7.

Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

 

1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

 

WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
NOTICE

Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or any funnel other than the one provided with your vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.

Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel system and its seal.

Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is gasoline before you refuel.

682

Information

This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation.

Specifications ………………………………

684

Emissions Testing

Identification Numbers

Testing of Readiness Codes…………..

689

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),

Warranty Coverages ……………………

692

Engine Number, and Transmission

Authorized Manuals…………………….

695

Number …………………………………..

686

Customer Service Information………

696

Devices that Emit Radio Waves …….

687

Reporting Safety Defects ……………..

688

683

Specifications

Information

 

Vehicle Specifications
Model

Civic*1

Civic TYPE R*2

No. of Passengers:

Front

2

Rear

3*1

2*2

Total

5*1

4*2

Weights:

Gross Vehicle Weight

See the certification label on the driver’s

Rating

doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight

See the certification label on the driver’s

Rating (Front)

doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight

See the certification label on the driver’s

Rating (Rear)

doorjamb

*1:

1.5 L engine models

*2:

2.0 L engine models

Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Type

HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)

Charge Quantity

13.2

– 15.0 oz (375 – 425 g)

Lubricant Type

RL85HM (POE)

Quantity

4.70

– 6.28 cu-in (77 – 103 ml)

Engine Specifications
Displacement

91.38 cu-in (1,498 cm3)*1

121.76 cu-in (1,996 cm3)*2

Spark Plugs

NGK

ILZKAR8H8S

*1:

1.5 L engine models

*2:

2.0 L engine models

Fuel
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number

Type

of 87 or higher*1

Unleaded premium gasoline, Pump octane

number of 91 or higher*2

Fuel Tank Capacity 12.39 US gal (46.9 L)

*1: Models without 18 or 20 inch wheels

*2: Models with 18 or 20 inch wheels

Washer Fluid
2.6 US qt (2.5 L)*1

U.S.:

3.2 US qt (3.0 L)*2

Tank Capacity

4.8 US qt (4.5 L)*1

Canada: 3.2 US qt (3.0 L)*2

*1: 1.5 L engine models

*2: 2.0 L engine models

■ Light Bulbs

 

Headlights (Low Beam)

55

W (H11)*1

LED*2

Headlights (High Beam)

60

W (HB3)*1

LED*2

Fog Lights*

35

W (H8)*3

LED*4

Parking/Daytime Running Lights

LED

Front Side Marker Lights

3 W

Front Turn Signal Lights

21

W (Amber)*1

LED*2

Side Turn Signal Lights

LED

(on Door Mirrors)*

Brake Lights

21

W

Rear Turn Signal Lights

21

W (Amber)

Taillights/Rear Side Marker Lights

LED

Back-Up Lights

16

W

Taillights

LED

High-Mount Brake Light

LED

Rear License Plate Light

LED

Interior Lights

Map Lights

8 W

Ceiling Light

8 W

Vanity Mirror Lights*

2 W

Center Pocket Lights*

LED

Glove Box Light

3.4 W

Cargo Area Light

5 W

 

*1: Models with halogen headlights

*2: Models with LED headlights

*3: Models with halogen fog lights

*4: Models with LED fog lights

* Not available on all models
uuSpecificationsu

Brake/Clutch* Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid*
Specified

Honda HCF-2

Capacity

Change

3.9 US qt (3.7 L)

Manual Transmission Fluid*
Specified

Honda MTF

Capacity

Change

2.0 US qt (1.9 L)*1

2.3 US qt (2.2 L)*2

*1:

1.5 L engine models

*2:

2.0 L engine models

Engine Oil
·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20

Recommended

·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Change

3.4 US qt (3.2 L)*1

5.3 US qt (5.0 L)*2

Capacity

Change

3.7 US qt (3.5 L)*1

including

5.7 US qt (5.4 L)*2

filter

*1:

1.5 L engine models

*2:

2.0 L engine models

Engine Coolant
Specified

Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

Ratio

50/50 with distilled water

1.5 L engine models

1.30

US gal (4.92

L)*1

(change including the remaining

0.15

US gal (0.58

L) in the reserve tank)

1.28

US gal (4.84

L)*2

Capacity

(change including the remaining

0.15

US gal (0.58

L) in the reserve tank)

 

2.0 L engine models

1.26 US gal (4.64 L)

(change including the remaining

0.20 US gal (0.75 L) in the reserve tank)

*1: Models with continuously variable transmission

*2: Models with manual transmission

■ Tire

215/55R16 93H*1

215/50R17 91H*2

Size

235/40R18 91W*3

235/40R18 95Y*4

Regular

245/30ZR20 90Y*5

Front

32 (220 [2.2])*1, *2

Pressure

35 (240 [2.4])*3, *4, *5

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Rear

32 (220 [2.2])*1, *2

33 (230 [2.3])*3, *4, *5

T125/80D16 97M*1, *2

Compact

Size

T125/70D17 98M*3

T125/70R18 99M*6

Spare

Pressure

60 (420 [4.2])

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

16 x 7J*1

Regular

17 x 7J*2

18 x 8J*3, *4

Wheel Size

20 x 8 1/2J*5

16 x 4T*1, *2

Compact Spare

17 x 4T*3

18 x 4T*6

*1: Models with 16 inch wheel

*2: Models with 17 inch wheel

*3: 1.5 L engine models with 18 inch wheel

*4: 2.0 L engine models with 18 inch wheel

*5: Models with 20 inch wheel

*6: 2.0 L engine models with optional compact spare tire

Information

 

* Not available on all models 685

Identification Numbers

Information

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number

 

Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.

The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are shown as follows.

 

1.5 L engine models

Vehicle Identification Number

Engine Number

Continuously Variable

Transmission Number

Manual Transmission

Certification Label/

Number

Vehicle Identification

Number

2.0 L engine models

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number

 

The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.

Engine Number

 

Manual Transmission Number

686

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below:

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Information

 

687

Reporting Safety Defects

Information

 

In the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.

688

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

 

Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions components are working properly.

The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.

To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON w*1, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

1.5 L engine models

 

Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in P (continuously variable transmission) or N (manual transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about 3 minutes.
Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
1Testing of Readiness Codes

 

The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.

If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.

Information

 

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued 689

Emissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Information

 

Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in D (continuously variable transmission) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
2.0 L engine models

 

Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in N. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about 3 minutes.
Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
690

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in 5th gear without using cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds). While the vehicle is traveling in this speed range, shift to 6th gear and then accelerate and decelerate 5 times, each time making sure you do not exceed 60 mph (97 km/h).
Park the vehicle and let the engine idle for 1 minute without using the accelerator pedal.
Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
Information

 

691

Information

 

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

692

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for commercial or industrial use.
Information

 

Continued 693

Warranty Coveragesu
Information

 

Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.

Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:

Director,

Light-Duty Vehicle Center,

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,

Attention: Warranty Claim

2000 Traverwood Drive,

Ann Arbor, MI 48105;

[email protected]

694

Authorized Manuals

Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.

For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.

Information

 

695

Customer Service Information

Information

 

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners Canadian Owners

American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Canada Inc.

Honda Automobile Customer Services Customer Relations

Mail Stop 100-5E-8A 180 Honda Boulevard

1919 Torrance Blvd. Markham, ON

Torrance, CA 90501-2746 L6C 0H9

Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: 1-877-939-0909

E-mail: [email protected]

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin

Islands

Bella International

P.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

1Customer Service Information

 

When you call or write, please give us the following information:

Vehicle Identification Number
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number P. 686
Date of purchase
Odometer reading of your vehicle
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the problem
Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
696

Disclaimer of Pandora®*
Requirements to access Pandora®

Latest version of the Pandora app installed on your Android, Blackberry, or iPhone.
Registered Pandora account (you can create a free account at www.pandora.com <http:// www.pandora.com/> or on your smartphone)
Connection to the internet via Wi-Fi or cellular data network.
Limitations

Access to Pandora requires an active internet connection
Ability to access Pandora through this system is subject to change without notice
Certain functionality of Pandora service is not available when accessing the service through this system including, but not limited to, creating new stations, deleting stations, emailing current stations, buying tracks, viewing additional text information, logging in to Pandora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality. Pandora internet radio is a music service not affiliated with HONDA. More information is available at http:// www.pandora.com <http:// www.pandora.com/>. Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
Mobile access requires a smartphone with an active data plan. Standard data rates may apply.
Pandora is only available in the United States.
uuCustomer Service Informationu

Information

 

* Not available on all models 697

Index

Index

Numbers

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode 465

A

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) 556

Accelerator Position Meter 131

Accessories and Modifications 631

Accessory Power Socket 208

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 99, 518

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

Low Speed Follow 99, 501

Adding the Coolant 590

Additives

Coolant 589

Engine Oil 582

Washer 593

Additives, Engine Oil 582

Adjusting

Armrest 200

Clock 144

Front Head Restraints 196

Front Seats 193

Mirrors 190

Rear Seats 199

Steering Wheel 189

Temperature 129

Adjusting the Clock 144

Adjusting the Sound 238

Agile Handling Assist 478

Air Conditioning System (Climate Control

Apple CarPlay …………………………………..

313

System) …………………………………………….

217

Audio/Information Screen …………………..

252

Changing the Mode …………………………..

220

Bluetooth® Audio ………………………

248, 303

Defrosting the Windshield and

Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout.. 256

Windows………………………………………..

221

Changing the Screen Interface …………….

270

Dust and Pollen Filter………………………….

624

Closing Apps ……………………………………

272

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ……………….

220

Customizing the Meter ………………………

256

Sensor……………………………………………..

224

Display Setup ……………………………………

274

Using Automatic Climate Control …………

217

Error Messages …………………………………

320

Air Pressure…………………………………

610, 685

General Information…………………………..

324

Airbags………………………………………………..

48

Home Screen ……………………………………

262

Advanced Airbags ……………………………….

54

HondaLink® …………………………………….

305

After a Collision ………………………………….

51

iPod …………………………………………

242, 291

Airbag Care………………………………………..

63

Limitations for Manual Operation

………… 275

Event Data Recorder………………………………

0

Menu Customize ………………………………

271

Front Airbags (SRS)………………………………

51

MP3/WMA/AAC ………………………..

245, 300

Indicator……………………………………….

60, 89

Pandora® ……………………………………….

298

Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ………

61

Reactivating ……………………………………..

229

Sensors ……………………………………………..

48

Recommended Devices ………………………

326

Side Airbags ……………………………………….

56

Remote Controls……………………………….

230

Side Curtain Airbags…………………………….

58

Security Code …………………………………..

229

AM/FM Radio……………………………………..

280

Selecting an Audio Source ………………….

275

Android Auto …………………………………….

316

Siri Eyes Free …………………………………….

312

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ………………

556

SiriusXM® Radio ………………………………..

283

Indicator…………………………………………….

89

Song By VoiceTM (SBV)………………………..

294

Apple CarPlay …………………………………….

313

Status Area ………………………………………

269

Armrest ……………………………………………..

200

Theft Protection ………………………………..

229

Audio Remote Controls ………………………

230

USB Flash Drives………………….

245, 300, 326

Audio System………………………………

226, 251

USB Port(s)……………………………………….

227

Adjusting the Sound……………………

238, 273

Voice Control Operation …………………….

276

Android Auto ……………………………………

316

Wallpaper Setup ……………………………….

260

698

Wi-Fi Connection ………………………………

310

Foot Brake ………………………………………..

552

Audio/Information Screen……………

234, 252

Indicator (Red) ………………………

82, 670, 671

Authorized Manuals …………………………..

695

Parking Brake ……………………………………

549

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking …………….

159

Braking Pressure Meter……………………….

131

Customize ……………………………………….

140

Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) …. 187

Auto High-Beam ………………………………..

181

Bulb Replacement ………………………………

594

Automatic Brake Hold ………………………..

553

Brake Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and

Indicator …………………………………….

84, 553

Back-Up Light ………………………………….

602

Automatic Brake Hold System

Fog Lights…………………………………………

596

Indicator …………………………………….

84, 553

Front Side Marker Lights ……………………..

599

Automatic Lighting…………………………….

178

Front Turn Signal Lights ………………………

598

Average Fuel Economy ……………………….

128

Headlights ………………………………………..

594

Average Speed …………………………………..

128

High-Mount Brake Light ……………………..

603

Parking/Daytime Running Lights …………..

601

B

Rear License Plate Light ………………………

603

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator

Battery ………………………………………………

620

Lights …………………………………………….

601

Charging System Indicator …………….

85, 668

Taillights …………………………………………..

603

If the Battery Is Dead………………………….

662

Taillights/Rear Side Marker Lights………….

603

Maintenance (Checking the Battery) …….

620

Bulb Specifications ……………………………..

684

Maintenance (Replacing)…………………….

622

Belts (Seat)…………………………………………..

40

C

Beverage Holders……………………………….

205

Bluetooth® Audio……………………………….

303

Carbon Monoxide Gas…………………………..

79

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ………..

383, 410

Cargo Area Cover ……………………………….

213

Booster Seats (For Children)………………….

78

Cargo Hook………………………………………..

212

Brake System ……………………………………..

549

Carrying Cargo…………………………….

445, 447

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ………………

556

Certification Label ………………………………

686

Automatic Brake Hold………………………..

553

Changing Bulbs…………………………………..

594

Brake Assist System……………………………

557

Charging System Indicator ……………..

85, 668

Fluid ……………………………………………….

592

Child Safety 64

Childproof Door Locks 158

Child Seat 64

Booster Seats 78

Child Seat for Infants 66

Child Seat for Small Children 67

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder

Seat Belt 72

Larger Children 77

Rear-facing Child Seat 66

Selecting a Child Seat 68

Using a Tether 74

Childproof Door Locks 158

Cleaning the Exterior 628

Cleaning the Interior 625

Climate Control System 217

Changing the Mode 217

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows 221

Dust and Pollen Filter 624

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode 220

Sensors 224

Using Automatic Climate Control 217

CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking

SystemTM) 491

Coat Hooks 211

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) 491

Compact Spare Tire 648, 685

Console Compartment 204

Index

699

Index

Continuously Variable Transmission

Display Setup ……………………………………..

239

Emergency Engine Stop………………………

661

Creeping ………………………………………….

460

Display/Information Button…………………

125

Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)

…… 689

Fluid ………………………………………………..

591

Door Mirrors ………………………………………

192

Engine

Kickdown …………………………………………

460

Doors…………………………………………………

145

Coolant …………………………………………..

589

Operating the Shift Lever ……………….

24, 462

Auto Door Locking …………………………….

159

If the Battery Is Dead………………………….

662

Shift Lever Does Not Move…………………..

665

Auto Door Unlocking …………………………

159

Oil ………………………………………………….

582

Shifting…………………………………………….

461

Keys ………………………………………………..

145

Starting…………………………………….

451, 454

Controls ……………………………………………..

143

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Switch Buzzer …………………………………..

171

Coolant (Engine)…………………………………

589

Inside …………………………………………….

156

Engine Coolant ………………………………….

589

Adding the Coolant ……………………………

590

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Adding the Coolant …………………………..

590

Overheating………………………………………

666

Outside ………………………………………….

147

Overheating……………………………………..

666

Creeping (Continuously Variable

DOT Tire Quality Grading ……………………

612

Temperature Gauge…………………………..

122

Transmission)…………………………………….

460

Drive Mode Switch ……………………………..

473

Engine Oil………………………………………….

582

Cup Holders………………………………………..

205

Driver Information Interface ……………….

124

Adding ……………………………………………

585

Customer Service Information ……………..

696

Driving ………………………………………………

443

Checking …………………………………………

583

Customized Features ……………………

134, 350

Braking ……………………………………………

549

Displaying Oil Life ……………………………..

574

Continuously Variable Transmission………

460

Low Oil Pressure Indicator ……………..

84, 668

D

Shifting Gear…………………………………….

468

Recommended Engine Oil …………………..

582

Shifting Position ………………………………..

461

ENGINE START/STOP Button………………..

172

Daytime Running Lights………………………

180

Starting the Engine……………………..

451, 454

EPS (Electric Power Steering) System

…… 672

Dead Battery ………………………………………

662

Dust and Pollen Filter………………………….

624

Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide).. 79

Defaulting All the Settings ………………….

379

Exterior Care (Cleaning) ……………………..

628

Defrosting the Windshield and

E

Exterior Mirrors………………………………….

192

Windows…………………………………………..

221

Devices that Emit Radio Waves…………….

687

Eco Assist System ………………………………….

11

F

Dimming

ECON Mode ……………………………………….

472

Headlights ………………………………………..

177

Elapsed Time………………………………………

128

Features …………………………………………….

225

Rearview Mirror …………………………………

190

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

…….. 89

Filters

Dipstick (Engine Oil) ……………………………

583

Indicator……………………………………..

89, 672

Dust and Pollen…………………………………

624

Directional Signals (Turn Signal)…………..

176

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)………….

475

Oil ………………………………………………….

586

Display Button ……………………………………

252

Emergency …………………………………………

679

Flat Tire……………………………………………..

635

700

Floor Mats 626

Fluids

Brake/Clutch 592

Continuously Variable Transmission 591

Engine Coolant 589

Manual Transmission 591

Windshield Washer 593

FM/AM Radio 240, 280

Fog Light Indicator 93

Folding Down the Rear Seats 199

Foot Brake 552

Front Airbags (SRS) 51

Front Head Restraints 196

Front Seat Heaters 215

Front Seats 193

Adjusting 193

Front Sensor Camera 546

Fuel 26, 562

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions 566

Gauge 122

Instant Fuel Economy 129

Low Fuel Indicator 88

Range 128

Recommendation 562

Refueling 562

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions 566

Fuel Fill Door 26, 564

Unable to Unlock 680

Fuses 674

Inspecting and Changing 678

Locations 674, 676

G

Gasoline (Fuel)

Economy 566

Gauge 122

Information 562

Instant Fuel Economy 129

Low Fuel Indicator 88

Refueling 562

Gauges 122

Gear Shift Lever Positions

Continuously Variable Transmission 461

Manual Transmission 468

Glass (care) 626, 629

Glove Box 203

G-Meter 131

H

Halogen Bulbs 594, 597

Handling the Unexpected 633

HandsFreeLink® (HFL) 383, 410

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook

and Call History 423

Displaying Messages 437

HFL Buttons 383, 410

HFL Menus 386, 413

HFL Status Display 385, 412

In Case of Emergency 441

Limitations for Manual Operation 385, 412

Making a Call 404, 431

Options During a Call 409, 434

Phone Setup 390, 418

Phonebook Phonetic Modification 427

Receiving a Call 408, 434

Receiving a Text Message/E-mail 435

Ring Tone 422

Selecting a Text/E-mail Message

Account 436

Speed Dial 400, 424

To Set Up Text Message/E-mail Options 421

Hatch 160

Light Bulb 684

Release Lever 681

Unable to Open 681

Hazard Warning Button 6

HD RadioTM 280

Headlights 177

Aiming 594

Auto High-Beam System 181

Automatic Operation 178

Dimming 177, 180

Operating 177

Heaters (Front Seat) 215

Heaters (Rear Seat) 216

HFL (HandsFreeLink®) 383, 410

High Beam Indicator 92

Hill Start Assist System 453, 458

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver 380

Honda App License Agreement 327

Honda Sensing® 27, 488

HondaLink® 305

Index

701

Index

I

Identification Numbers 686

Vehicle Identification 686

Ignition Switch 171

Illumination Control 187

Knob 187

Immobilizer System 163

Immobilizer System Indicator 94

Indicators 82

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with

Low Speed Follow 100, 501

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 89

Auto High-Beam 93

Automatic Brake Hold 84, 553

Automatic Brake Hold System 84, 553

Charging System 85, 668

Collision Mitigation Braking

SystemTM (CMBSTM) 101, 102, 103

Drive Mode 93

ECON Mode 95, 472

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System .. 89, 672

Fog Light 93

Gear Position 87

High Beam 92

Immobilizer System 94

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) .. 100, 535

Lights On 92

Low Fuel 88

Low Oil Pressure 84, 668

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS 91, 482, 486

M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/

Shift Indicator 86

Malfunction Indicator Lamp 85, 669

Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber) .. 83

Parking Brake and Brake System

(Red) 82, 670, 671

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) 96

Seat Belt Reminder 42, 88

Security System Alarm 95

Shift Down 86

Shift Lever Position 86

Shift Up 86

Supplemental Restraint System 60, 89

System Message 92

Transmission System 86

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning 92

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF .. 90, 476

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®)

System 90, 475

Information 683

Instant Fuel Economy 129

Instrument Panel 81

Brightness Control 187

Interior Lights 201

Interior Rearview Mirror 190

iPod 291

J

Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) 652

Handling of the Jack 656

Jump Starting 662

K

Key Number Tag 146

Keys 145

Number Tag 146

Rear Door Won’t Open 158

Remote Transmitter 153

Types and Functions 145

Won’t Turn 30

Kickdown (Continuously Variable

Transmission) 460

L

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 533

LaneWatchTM 480

Language (HFL) 412

LATCH (Child Seats) 69

Lights 177, 594

Automatic 178

Bulb Replacement 594

Daytime Running Lights 180

Fog Lights 180

High Beam Indicator 92

Interior 201

Light Switches 177

Lights On Indicator 92

Turn Signals 176

Limited Slip Differential (LSD) 479

702

Load Limits 447

Locking/Unlocking 145

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking 159

Childproof Door Locks 158

From Inside 156

From Outside 147

Keys 145

Using a Key 154

Low Battery Charge 668

Low Fuel Indicator 88

Low Oil Pressure Indicator 84, 668

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal

Strength 146

Lower Anchors 69

Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) 447

M

Maintenance 569

Adding the Coolant 590

Battery 620

Brake/Clutch Fluid 592

Cleaning 625

Climate Control System 624

Coolant 589

Maintenance MinderTM 573

Oil 583

Precautions 570

Remote Transmitter 622

Replacing Light Bulbs 594

Safety 571

Service Items 576

Tires 609

Transmission Fluid 591

Under the Hood 579

Malfunction Indicator Lamp 85, 669

Manual Transmission 468

Map Lights 202

Maximum Load Limit 447

Meters, Gauges 122

Mirrors 190

Adjusting 190

Door 192

Exterior 192

Interior Rearview 190

Modifications (and Accessories) 631

Moonroof 170

MP3 245, 300

Multi-View Rear Camera 560

N

Numbers (Identification) 686

O

Odometer 127

Oil (Engine) 582

Adding 585

Checking 583

Displaying Oil Life 574

Low Oil Pressure Indicator 84, 668

Recommended Engine Oil 582

Viscosity 582

Open Source Licenses 341

Opening

Hatch 681

Opening/Closing

Hatch 160

Hood 581

Moonroof 170

Power Windows 167

Outside Temperature Display 129

Overheating 666

P

Paddle Shifters (7-Speed Manual

Shift Mode) 25, 465, 466

Pandora® 298

Panic Mode 166

Parking 558

Parking Brake 549

Parking Brake and Brake System

Indicator (Amber) 83

Parking Brake and Brake System

Indicator (Red) 82, 670, 671

Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator 61

Passing Indicators 177

Playing Bluetooth® Audio 248, 303

Power Windows 167

Precautions While Driving 459

Rain 459

Index

703

Index

Pregnant Women …………………………………

46

Resetting a Trip Meter ………………………..

127

Puncture (Tire) ……………………………………

635

Rev Indicators …………………………………….

131

Rev Match System ………………………………

469

R

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) ………

541

On and Off……………………………………….

543

Radar Sensor ………………………………………

548

Radio (FM/AM)…………………………….

240, 280

S

Radio (SiriusXM®)………………………………..

283

Radio Data System (RDS)………………

241, 282

Safe Driving …………………………………………

35

Range ………………………………………………..

128

Safety Check ………………………………………..

39

RDS (Radio Data System)………………

241, 282

Safety Labels………………………………………..

80

Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)

……. 689

Safety Message………………………………………

3

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror

Seat Belts …………………………………………….

40

Button………………………………………………

188

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor………………

45

Rear Seat Heaters ……………………………….

216

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ……………..

43

Rear Seats (Folding Down)…………………..

199

Checking……………………………………………

47

Rearview Mirror………………………………….

190

Fastening …………………………………………..

44

Refueling……………………………………………

562

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder

Fuel Gauge ……………………………………….

122

Seat Belt…………………………………………..

72

Gasoline ……………………………………

562, 684

Pregnant Women ………………………………..

46

Low Fuel Indicator ……………………………….

88

Reminder …………………………………………..

42

Regulations ………………………….

486, 612, 687

Warning Indicator ………………………….

42, 88

Remote Engine Start …………………………..

456

Seat Heaters………………………………..

215, 216

Remote Transmitter…………………………….

153

Seats ………………………………………………….

193

Replacement

Adjusting …………………………………………

193

Battery……………………………………………..

622

Front Seat Heaters……………………………..

215

Bulbs ……………………………………………….

594

Front Seats ……………………………………….

193

Fuses ………………………………………..

674, 676

Rear Seats ………………………………………..

199

Tires ………………………………………………..

615

Seat Heaters………………………………

215, 216

Wiper Blade Rubber…………………….

604, 607

Security System…………………………………..

163

Reporting Safety Defects …………………….

688

Security System Alarm Indicator……………..

95

Select Lever 24, 461, 468

Operation 24, 462, 468

Releasing 665

Won’t Move 665

Select/Reset Knob 127

Selecting a Child Seat 68

Selector Knob (Audio) 233

Setting the Clock 144

Shift Lever 24, 461, 468

Shift Lever Position Indicator 86

Shift Position Indicator 462

Shifting (Transmission) 461, 468

Shoulder Anchor 45

Side Airbags 56

Side Curtain Airbags 58

Siri Eyes Free 312

SiriusXM® Radio 283

Smart Entry with Push Button Start

System 147

Snow Tires 617

Song By VoiceTM (SBV) 294

Spare Tire 648, 685

Spark Plugs 684

Specifications 684

Specified Fuel 562, 684

Speedometer 122

SRS Airbags (Airbags) 51

Starting the Engine 451, 454

Does Not Start 659

Engine Switch Buzzer 171

If the Battery Is Dead 662

704

Remote Engine Start ………………………….

456

Spare Tire ………………………………….

648, 685

Steering Wheel

Summer …………………………………………..

617

Adjusting …………………………………………

189

Temporary Tire Repair Kit ……………………

636

Stopping ……………………………………………

558

Tire Chains ……………………………………….

617

Stopwatch …………………………………………

132

Wear Indicators …………………………………

614

Summer Tires……………………………………..

617

Winter ……………………………………………..

617

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

……. 51

Tools ………………………………………………….

634

Switches (Around the Steering

Towing Your Vehicle

Wheel) ……………………………………..

6, 7, 171

Emergency ……………………………………….

679

System Message Indicator …………………….

92

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

Turbo Engine Vehicle 567

Turbo Meter 129

Turn Signals 176

Indicators (Instrument Panel) 92

Turn-by-Turn Directions 130

U

Unlocking the Doors 147

Unlocking the Front Doors from the

T

Tachometer 122

Temperature

Outside Temperature Display 129

Temperature Sensor 129

Temporary Tire Repair Kit 636

Tie-down Anchors 212

Time (Setting) 144

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) 482

Indicator 91, 673

Tires 609

Air Pressure 610, 685

Checking and Maintaining 609

Inspection 609

Labeling 610

Puncture (Flat Tire) 635

Regulations 612

Rotation 616

System) 482

Indicator 91, 673

Transmission 461, 468

Continuously Variable Transmission 461

Fluid 591

Manual 468

Shift Lever Position Indicator 86, 462, 464

Trip Meter 127

Troubleshooting 633

Blown Fuse 674, 676

Brake Pedal Vibrates 30

Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door 31

Emergency Towing 679

Engine Won’t Start 659

Noise When Braking 32

Overheating 666

Premium Gasoline 684

Puncture/Flat Tire 635

Rear Door Won’t Open 31, 158

Select Lever Won’t Move 665

Warning Indicators 82

Inside ……………………………………………….

156

USB Adapter Cable……………………………..

226

USB Flash Drives ………………………….

300, 326

USB Port(s) …………………………………………

227

Using the Smart Entry with Push Button

Start System ……………………………………..

147

V

Vanity Mirrors………………………………………..

9

Vehicle Identification Number …………….

686

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) …………..

475

Off Button………………………………………..

476

Off Indicator……………………………………….

90

System Indicator………………………………….

90

Viscosity (Oil) ………………………………

582, 685

Index

705

Index

Voice Control Operation ……………………..

276

Washer Fluid …………………………………….

593

Audio Commands………………………………

278

Wiper Blades …………………………………….

604

Climate Control Commands ………………..

279

Wipers and Washers…………………………..

184

General Commands……………………………

279

Winter Tires ……………………………………….

617

Music Search Commands…………………….

279

Snow Tires ……………………………………….

617

On Screen Commands ………………………..

279

Tire Chains ……………………………………….

617

Phone Commands ……………………………..

278

Wipers and Washers……………………………

184

Useful Commands ……………………………..

278

Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades …..

604

Voice Portal Screen …………………………….

277

Front ……………………………………………….

184

Voice Recognition………………………………

276

Rear ………………………………………………..

186

VSA® (Vehicle Stability AssistTM)……………

475

Wireless Charger ………………………………..

209

WMA ………………………………………….

245, 300

W

Worn Tires …………………………………………

609

Wallpaper……………………………………

236, 260

Warning and Information Messages …….

104

Warning Indicator On/Blinking…………….

668

Warning Labels …………………………………….

80

Warranties (Warranty Manual provided

separately)………………………………………..

692

Watts …………………………………………………

684

Wear Indicators (Tire)………………………….

614

Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle)…………

652

Wi-Fi Connection ………………………………..

310

Window Washers………………………………..

184

Adding/Refilling Fluid………………………….

593

Switch ……………………………………………..

184

Windows (Opening and Closing)………….

167

Windshield …………………………………………

184

Cleaning……………………………………

626, 629

Defrosting/Defogging …………………………

221

706

 

owners.honda.com (U.S.)

honda.ca (Canada)

31TGG640

2021 Honda Civic Hatchback Owner’s Manual

OM-14570

00X31-TGG-6400

© 2020 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved

Printed in U.S.A.

 

Leave a Reply 0

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *


This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.